JP2012081355A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a slot machine which can diversify the result of display on a variable display device, which can suppress the storage capacity of table data for use in the derivation control of the result of the display, and which can prevent a game from becoming monotonous in a high-probability state of replay.SOLUTION: A CPU 41a performs stop control by a table system or a table+control system in all first-third stop operations in regard to a combination having a loss and including a drop combination as the result of an internal lottery, and controls only the first stop operation by the table system or the table+control system and controls the stop operations on second and after by the control system, in regard to the combination with no loss. In addition, the CPU 41a ends an RT (2) when any one of cherries wins a prize or when the prescribed number of games is reached in a state in which no cherry wins the prize, after the start of the RT (2).

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable.

  The slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel starts to rotate by operating a start lever. Further, when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped. A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  The types of winning combinations (combination of symbols) include small roles that accompany game value such as medals, and games without using game values such as medals to set the number of bets for the next game. There are re-playing roles (replay) that can be started, and special roles (bonus) with a gaming state advantageous to the player such as regular bonus and big bonus.

  These winning combinations are controlled so that when one of the winning combinations is won in the internal lottery performed at the start of the game, the winning combinations are arranged for a plurality of reels, and the winning combinations are not included in the internal drawing. In general, it is controlled so that a winning combination is generated according to the complete combination.

  As described above, there are mainly a control method and a table method as a method for controlling so that the combination is not aligned or not according to the result of the internal lottery. In the control method, when a stop operation is performed, it is determined whether or not the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is located within the drawing range to the winning line, and if the symbol is within the drawing range, the symbol is drawn into the winning line. If the symbol that does not correspond to the lottery result is located on the winning line, the symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped on the winning line. The kick control is performed so as not to occur (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Further, in the table system, a reel table in which a symbol (the number of sliding symbols) to be stopped on the winning line is stored in advance at every stop operation timing is stored in advance, and when the stop operation is performed, the lottery result of the game is displayed. By referring to the corresponding reel table and performing control to stop the symbols determined on the reel table on the winning line at the timing when the stop operation is performed, the above-described pull-in control and kick-off control are realized. (For example, see Patent Document 2)

  Furthermore, as this type of slot machine, a replay game that allows a player to draw a special role by playing a game while suppressing the amount of decrease in game value by increasing the probability of the occurrence of a replay role over the normal gaming state. Slot machines that control to a high probability state (so-called replay time) have been proposed (see, for example, Patent Documents 3 and 4).

JP-A-2-283385 JP 2003-325753 A JP-A-6-335560 JP 2005-131323 A

  However, in the case of using a control method as a reel stop control as in the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, the pull-in control and the kick-off control are uniquely performed according to the result of the internal lottery. The display result was monotonous and lacked interest. On the other hand, in the case of using a table system such as the slot machine described in Patent Document 2, although the display result can be various, the result of the internal lottery is that the stop time (all reels are rotating, either It is necessary to prepare a separate table for each situation, such as when one reel is already stopped, when any two reels are already stopped, etc.) There was a problem that the storage capacity of the table data would be enormous.

  In the slot machines described in Patent Documents 3 and 4, either the special game wins after the replay time starts, or the special game number elapses without winning any special game The replay time ends when the above conditions are met, but after the start of the replay time, the specified number of games is reached or the special role is elected regardless of the player's technical intervention. As a result, the replay time ends, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous simply by digesting the replay time.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, can diversify the display results of the variable display device, can suppress the storage capacity of the table data used for derivation control of the display results, It is an object of the present invention to provide a slot machine that can prevent a game from becoming monotonous in a replay high probability state.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
Variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C) capable of deriving and displaying a display result in each of three variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can each be identified 2R),
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Before a display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived, a replay prize (replay) with a replay (replay game) that can be played without using the game value, and Predetermining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow the generation of a plurality of types of winnings including a winning prize (small role) accompanied by the awarding of the game value;
Respective deriving operation means (operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel);
When the deriving operation means (operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated, the variable display area (stop switches 8L, 8C, Derivation control means for performing control for deriving the display result of 8R operation),
A re-game high probability state in which the pre-determining means controls to a re-game high probability state (RT (2)) in which the determination to allow the occurrence of the re-game winning (replay) is performed with a higher probability than the normal game state. Control means;
After the re-playing high probability state (RT (2)) starts, a re-playing high probability state ending means for ending the re-playing high probability state (RT (2)) when a predetermined end condition is satisfied;
With
The re-playing high probability state ending means is configured such that, after the re-playing high probability state (RT (2)) is started, before the number of games digested reaches a specified number of games, When the specific prize winning (falling combination) occurs or when the specified number of games is reached without the specific prize winning (RT (2)), the replay high probability state (RT (2)) Exit,
The derivation control means includes
When the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at each operation timing with respect to each of a plurality of predetermined operation timings (stop operation positions), the operation is derived to the variable display area. Derivation control table storage means (table creation data stored in ROM 41b) for storing a plurality of predetermined derivation control tables (stop control tables) so that display results can be specified;
Select one of a plurality of derivation control tables stored in the derivation control table storage unit according to the determination result of the predetermination unit (corresponding to the stop position of the stopped reel as a result of the internal lottery) Derivation control table selection means for selecting a stop control table to be
At the time when the derivation operation means is operated, a display result that can be derived according to the determination result of the pre-decision means in the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means (the winning combination is divided according to the number of sliding frames 0 to 4). Display result search means for searching for (stop position aligned with the winning line),
Control for deriving a display result to a variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on the derivation control table (stop control table) selected by the derivation control table selection means when the derivation operation means is operated. First derivation control means to perform (table method, stop control by table + control method);
When the derivation operation means is operated, a second derivation control means for performing control for deriving the display result searched by the display result search means to the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means (stop by the control method) Control), and
Including
When the derivation operation means is operated, either the first derivation control means (table method, stop control by table + control method) or the second derivation control means (stop control by control method) While performing control to derive the display result in the variable display area,
Further, the derivation control means includes
When the decision result of the pre-decision means is the first decision result (a role with a losing and missing) including a decision to allow the occurrence of the specific award winning (falling combination) A first variable display area (first stop reel) corresponding to the derivation operation means, a third variable display area (third stop reel) corresponding to the last operated derivation operation means, and the first variable display area (first The derivation operation means corresponding to the derivation operation means operated between the operation of the derivation operation means corresponding to the stop reel) and the operation of the derivation operation means corresponding to the third variable display area (third stop reel). Among the two variable display areas (second stop reels), at least one of the variable display areas is displayed by the first derivation control means (table system, table + control system stop control). A first result when deriving control means for performing control to out,
The first variable display area (first stop reel) and the second variable display area (second stop reel) when the determination result of the pre-determining means is a second determination result (a role that is not missed) Among the third variable display areas (third stop reels), there are more variable display areas than when the determination result of the pre-determining means is the first determination result (a role that is lost or missed). Second result time derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result by the second derivation control means (stop control by the control method);
Including
The first result time derivation control means is determined by the predetermining means to allow the occurrence of the specific award winning (tumbling combination), and the specific winning operation procedure (at the timing of the winning range of the winning cherry) When the operation of the derivation operation means is performed in the procedure of performing the stop operation of the left reel), the display result is displayed in the plurality of variable display areas so as to be a combination of display results corresponding to the specific award winning (falling combination) The operation of the derivation operation means is performed in a non-specific winning operation procedure (a procedure for stopping the left reel at a timing outside the drawing range of the winning color cherry) different from the specific winning operation procedure. Specific derivation control means for performing control for deriving display results to the plurality of variable display areas so that the combination of display results corresponding to the specific award winning prize (tumbling combination) is not made It is characterized by a non-thing.
According to this feature, even if it is determined that after the start of the replay high probability state, it is determined that the generation of the specific prize winning that will cause the replay high probability state to end, the second specific winning operation procedure, Since the player performs an operation in an operation procedure that can avoid the occurrence of a specific grant prize, that is, the replay high probability state can be continued up to the specified number of games by the player's technical intervention, the replay high probability state Does not become monotonous and can enhance interest.
In addition, the control result for deriving the display result to the variable display area using the derivation control table according to the determination result by the predetermining means, and the stop timing of the variable display area, and the display result retrieved by the display result search means are variable display area Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a derivation control table in advance for all the determination results by the predetermining means and all the stop timings of the variable display area, so that the storage capacity of the derivation control table is small. That's it
Further, when the determination result of the predetermination means is the first determination result, control for deriving the display result to the variable display area using the derivation control table for the at least one stop time (variable display area) (first In the case where the determination result of the prior determination means is the second determination result, the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result. Perform control for deriving the display result searched by the display result search means to the variable display area for the stop time (variable display area) more than a certain case (control for deriving the display result by the second derivation control means) In the case of the first determination result, since the first derivation control means performs control for deriving the display result for a stop time that is relatively larger than the second determination result, While the results can be designed in a variety of ways, in the case of the second determination result, the second derivation control means performs control for deriving the display result for a stop time that is relatively larger than the first determination result. The storage capacity of the derivation control table required when the result is the second determination result can be greatly reduced. That is, it is possible to design various display results according to the types of determination results of the pre-decision means, and to reduce the storage capacity of the derivation control table.
Further, when it is determined by the predetermining means that the generation of the specific award winning, that is, the winning that may be missed depending on the operating procedure of the derivation operating means, Since the control for deriving the display result is performed by the derivation control means, it is determined that the generation of the specific award winning is permitted, and the display result when the specific award winning cannot be generated is given diversity. be able to.
Note that the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. good. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
The re-playing high probability state may be, for example, that a predetermined prize is generated, a display result of the variable display device is a predetermined display result, or a game state advantageous to the player is ended. As long as it starts from the moment.
In addition, the replay high probability state ending means may end the replay high probability state immediately when a specific grant award occurs, or for a certain period of time when a specific grant award occurs. And the replay high probability state may be terminated.
In addition, for each of a plurality of predetermined operation timings, the display result derived to the variable display area can be specified when the derivation operation means is operated at each operation timing. The derivation control table includes the amount of symbol movement (so-called number of sliding symbols) from when the derivation operation means is operated until the display result is derived, the identification number that can identify the derived display result, etc. By specifying the data registered at each timing and the derivation derivation position among a plurality of predetermined derivation positions, the display result derived to the variable display area at each operation timing can be specified. Data. Further, the data may be compressed data so that the data can be expanded by a predetermined algorithm.
Further, the timing at which the display result search means searches for a display result that can be derived according to the determination result of the prior determination means may be before or after the derivation operation means is operated.
In addition, the derivation control unit is configured to derive the display result in the first variable display region, the second variable display region, and the third variable display region when the determination result of the prior determination unit is the first determination result. Any control may be used as long as the first derivation control means controls the display result for at least one of the timings, and the second derivation control means controls the display result for the remaining periods. Just do it. Moreover, when the determination result of the prior determination means is the first determination result, the first derivation control means may perform control for deriving the display result for all times.
The derivation control means causes the display result to be derived to the first variable display area, the second variable display area, and the third variable display area when the determination result of the prior determination means is the second determination result. Of the timings, the second derivation control unit may perform control for deriving the display result for a larger number of times than when the determination result of the prior determination unit is the first determination result. For the remaining time, the first derivation control means may perform control to derive the display result. In addition, when the first determination result is the first determination result, the first derivation control means performs control for deriving the display result for all the timings. Any control may be used as long as the second derivation control means controls the display result to be derived. Further, when the determination result of the prior determination means is the second determination result, control may be performed so that the display result is derived by the second derivation control means for all times.
The third variable display area (the last operated derivation) after the derivation operation means corresponding to the first variable display area (the first variable display area corresponding to the first operated derivation operation means) is operated. The second variable display area (intermediate variable display area) corresponding to the derivation operation means operated until the derivation operation means corresponding to the final variable display area corresponding to the operation means is operated as one variable display. It may be an area or a plurality of variable display areas. Further, if there are a plurality of second variable display areas (intermediate variable display areas), it is only necessary to provide derivation operation means corresponding to each.

A slot machine according to claim 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1,
The derivation control means includes
Derived information (the number of sliding frames) for specifying the display result derived in the variable display area can be stored corresponding to each of the plurality of predetermined operation timings (stop operation positions). Derived information storage area (virtual sliding frame table assigned to the RAM 41c);
The derivation control table (stop control table) selected by the derivation control table selection means is read, and the derivation information (the number of sliding symbols) based on the derivation control table (stop control table) is used as the plurality of predetermined operations. Derived information storage means for storing in the derived information storage area (virtual sliding top table) in association with each of timing (stop operation position);
Including
The derivation information storage means is the derivation control table (stop control table) before the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area being changed is operated (before the stop operation of the rotating reel becomes effective). The derived information storage area (virtual sliding frame table) is associated with each of the plurality of predetermined operation timings (stop operation positions) of the variable display area that is changing. )
The first derivation control means (table method, table + control stop control) operates the derivation operation means in the derivation information storage area (virtual sliding top table) when the derivation operation means is operated. Control is performed to derive a display result specified by the derived information (number of sliding frames) stored corresponding to the timing (stop operation position) to a variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means. .
According to this feature, the derivation information based on the derivation information registered in the derivation control table before the derivation operation means is operated is stored in the derivation information storage area. Therefore, the derivation control is performed after the derivation operation means is operated. It is not necessary to perform processing to identify the derivation control table according to the decision result of the predetermination means or the already derived display result in order to read the table, and the display result is derived after the derivation operation means is operated. It is possible to promptly perform control.
Further, the derivation control table is preferably stored in a compressed state, and by doing so, the storage capacity of the derivation control table can be reduced. Furthermore, when the derivation control table is stored in a compressed state, the derivation information storage means performs the derivation control before the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area being changed is operated. The derivation control table (stop control table) selected by the table selection means is expanded, and derivation information (the number of sliding frames) based on the expanded derivation control table is stored in the derivation information storage area (virtual sliding frame table). Preferably, in such a case, it is not necessary to expand the derivation control table after the derivation operation means is operated, and control for deriving the display result can be performed more quickly after the derivation operation means is operated. .

A slot machine according to claim 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 2,
The derivation control means generates derivation information (the number of sliding symbols) for specifying a display result derived in the variable display area corresponding to each of the predetermined operation timings (stop operation positions). Including a derived information storage area (virtual sliding frame table allocated to the RAM 41c) that can be stored;
The display result search means is configured to determine the plurality of predetermined operation timings before the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area being changed is operated (before the stop operation of the rotating reel becomes effective). For each (stop operation position), a display result that can be derived according to the determination result of the pre-determining means (stop position where the winning combination is aligned with the winning line according to the number of sliding frames of 0 to 4) is searched, and the searched display The derivation information storage area (the number of sliding frames) for specifying the result is associated with each of the plurality of predetermined operation timings (stop operation positions) in the variable display area during the change. Stored in a virtual sliding frame table)
The second derivation control means (stop control by the control method) is configured such that when the derivation operation means is operated, an operation timing (stop operation position) of the derivation operation means in the derivation information storage area (virtual sliding top table). The display result specified by the derivation information (the number of sliding frames) stored corresponding to) is controlled to be derived to the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means.
According to this feature, it is not necessary to search for a display result that can be derived according to the determination result of the pre-decision unit after the derivation operation unit is operated, so that the display result is derived after the derivation operation unit is operated. Control can be performed promptly.

A slot machine according to claim 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The display result search means is a display result that can be derived according to a determination result of the predetermined determination means for each of a plurality of predetermined operation timings (stop operation positions). Search for a stop position that matches the winning line)
The derivation control means includes
Derived information (the number of sliding frames) for specifying the display result derived in the variable display area can be stored corresponding to each of the plurality of predetermined operation timings (stop operation positions). Derived information storage area (virtual sliding frame table assigned to the RAM 41c);
The derivation control table (stop control table) selected by the derivation control table selection means is read, and the derivation information (the number of sliding symbols) based on the derivation control table (stop control table) is used as the plurality of predetermined operations. Derived information storage means for storing in the derived information storage area (virtual sliding top table) in association with each of timing (stop operation position);
The priority of the display result specified from the derived information (number of sliding frames) stored in the derived information storage area (virtual sliding frame table), and the display result (number of sliding frames) searched by the display result search means A priority comparison / determination means for comparing the priority of the stop position separately searched) for each operation timing (stop operation position);
As a result of the comparison by the priority comparison determination means, the display result searched by the display result search means (stop position searched by the number of sliding frames) corresponds to the operation timing (stop operation position) with higher priority. The display result (stop position searched by the number of sliding frames) searched by the display result search means for the derived information (number of sliding frames) stored in the derived information storage area (virtual sliding frame table) is specified. Derivation information updating means for updating to the derivation information (the number of sliding frames) for
Including
The derived information update means is searched by the display result search means before the derivation operation means corresponding to the variable display area being changed is operated (before the stop operation of the rotating reel becomes effective). The derivation information stored in the derivation information storage area (virtual sliding piece table) corresponding to the operation timing (stopping operation position) having a higher priority in the display result (stop position searched by the number of sliding pieces). The number of sliding frames) is updated to the derived information for specifying the display result (stop position searched by the number of sliding frames) searched by the display result search means,
The first derivation control means (stop control by table + control method) is configured such that when the derivation operation means is operated, an operation timing (stop) of the derivation operation means in the derivation information storage area (virtual sliding top table). Control is performed to derive a display result specified by the derivation information (the number of sliding frames) stored corresponding to the operation position) to a variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means.
According to this feature, it is possible to derive a display result other than the display result specified from the derivation control table even when performing control for deriving the display result in the variable display area using the derivation control table. Further, for example, even when erroneous information is defined in the derivation control table, it is possible to correct the derived display result according to the determination result of the prior determination means.

  In addition, the derived information for specifying the display result derived in the variable display area in claims 2 to 4 is, for example, the amount of movement of the symbol from when the deriving operation means is operated until the display result is derived This corresponds to (so-called number of sliding frames), an identification number that can specify a derived display result, and the like.

A slot machine according to claim 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 4,
The derivation control table selecting means allows the first winning means (big bonus (1) to (3)) or the second winning (red cherry, blue cherry, white cherry) to be generated by the predetermining means. Is determined, a display result corresponding to the first winning, and a display result corresponding to the second winning with respect to a timing (stop operation position) that does not overlap among the plurality of operation timings. , Select a common derivation control table defined so that each can be identified,
The display result search means includes:
The operation timing (stop operation position) when the derivation operation means is operated when it is determined by the prior determination means that the first winning (big bonus (1) to (3)) is allowed to occur. ) To establish the second winning (red cherry, blue cherry, white cherry) from the display result that can be derived to the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means (stop position according to the number of sliding frames from 0 to 4). Search for the second non-winning display result to avoid and identify the second non-winning display result,
Operation timing (stop operation position) at which the derivation operation means is operated when it is determined by the prior determination means that the second winning (red cherry, blue cherry, white cherry) is allowed to occur The first winning (Big Bonus (1) to (3)) is established from the display result that can be derived to the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means (stop position according to the number of sliding frames of 0 to 4). Search for the first non-winning display result to avoid and identify the first non-winning display result,
The priority comparison determination unit allows the first determination unit to generate the first winning (big bonus (1) to (3)) or the second winning (red cherry, blue cherry, white cherry). Whether or not the display result specified from the common derivation control table is an unavoidable display result in which a winning that has not been determined to be allowed by the pre-determining means is unavoidable. Including display result determination means for determining each operation timing (stop operation position),
The derivation information update means allows the occurrence of the first prize (big bonuses (1) to (3)) or the second prize (red cherry, blue cherry, white cherry) by the prior decision means. Is determined, the derived information (slip) stored in the derived information storage area corresponding to the operation timing (stop operation position) determined to be the inevitable display result by the display result determining means. The number of frames) is updated to the derived information (the number of sliding frames) for specifying the display result searched by the display result search means.
According to this feature, by using the common derivation control table, it is possible to easily design the display result when it is determined that the first winning and the second winning are allowed, and the first winning is achieved. Depending on the result of both decisions without separately preparing the derivation control table in the case where it is determined that the occurrence of only the second prize is determined and the case where it is determined that the generation of only the second winning is permitted. Since it is possible to perform control for deriving the display result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the derivation control table while diversifying the display result of the variable display device.
The first non-winning display result (second non-winning display result) that avoids the establishment of the first winning (second winning) is that the display result is derived in all of the plurality of variable display areas. It is a display result that does not constitute a combination of the first prize (second prize) at the time.
Further, an inevitable display result in which a winning that has not been determined to be allowed by the pre-determining means is unavoidable is that the pre-determining means permits when a display result is derived for all of the plurality of variable display areas. Is a display result that cannot be avoided to be a combination of winnings that has not been determined, for example, a winning that has not been determined to be allowed by the predetermining means by a combination with display results already derived in other variable display areas The display result that the combination of is established, or even when two or more variable display areas are still changing, the display result is derived to one of the variable display areas, the other variable display area Display results that do not wait for derivation of the display result of the game and cannot avoid the establishment of a winning combination that has not been determined to be allowed by the pre-determining means (IWAYU Prohibited eyes), and the like.
In the case where it is determined that the first winning is allowed and the second winning is allowed simultaneously, the display result corresponding to the first winning and the first winning The display result corresponding to one of the display results corresponding to the second prize may be set as a higher priority than the other display result.
In addition, the first prize or the second prize may be the specific award or a prize other than the specific award.

A slot machine according to claim 6 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 5,
The first prize is a prize (big bonus (1) to (3)) accompanied by a transition to a special gaming state (bonus) advantageous to the player,
The slot machine is determined to allow the first winning (big bonus (1) to (3)) to be generated by the pre-determining means, and when the first winning is not generated, A carry-over means for carrying over the decision to allow the occurrence of the first winning (winning flag of big bonuses (1) to (3)) after the next game;
The pre-determining means is configured so that the first prize (big bonus (1) to (1) to (big bonus (1) to (3)) is not carried over in a state where the decision to allow the first prize (big bonus (1) to (3)) is allowed). It is possible to determine simultaneously that the occurrence of (3)) is allowed and that the second winning (red cherry, blue cherry, white cherry) is allowed to occur.
According to this feature, when it is determined that only the first winning or the second winning is permitted, the first winning is permitted, and the second winning is permitted. When both are determined, it is possible to perform control for deriving the display result according to both determination results without preparing a derivation control table separately, so the storage capacity of the derivation control table is reduced. It can be greatly reduced.

A slot machine according to a seventh aspect of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects,
The specific award (falling combination) is an award (small combination) that is accompanied by the awarding of a gaming value (three) less than the number necessary for setting the maximum bet number (3) that can be set for one game. ).
According to this feature, the specific award winning is a winning accompanied with a game value less than the number required for setting the maximum bet number that can be set for one game. The occurrence of a specific award is allowed, and even if a specific award is missed in order to avoid the end of the replay high probability state, the player does not suffer a great disadvantage.

A slot machine according to claim 8 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
Special game state control means for controlling to a special game state (big bonus) advantageous to the player when a special prize (special role) occurs,
The pre-determining means is a state in which the special game state (big bonus) is controlled, and the maximum number of grants (15 When determining to allow the occurrence of a non-maximum award winning (small role other than a bell) with a gaming value of less than the number of cards), it is accompanied by a gaming value of the maximum number of grants (15) At the same time, it is decided to allow the maximum award (bell)
The derivation control means is simultaneously determined by the pre-determining means to allow the non-maximum prize winning (small role other than the bell) and the maximum prize winning (bell). When the derivation operation means corresponding to any one of the variable display areas is operated, the display result constituting the maximum prize winning (bell) is the display result constituting the non-maximum prize winning (small role other than the bell). It includes a priority derivation control means for performing control for deriving to the variable display area corresponding to the operated derivation operation means in preference to the operated derivation operation means.
According to this feature, when it is determined that the occurrence of a non-maximum award winning with a smaller number of gaming values awarded than the maximum award winning when being controlled in a special gaming state, In addition to determining that the occurrence of a prize is allowed, the display result constituting the maximum prize-winning is derived to the variable display area in preference to the display result constituting the non-maximum prize-winning. Gaming value that can be obtained by a player in a special gaming state because it is possible to obtain gaming value and minimize the possibility that the number of gaming value to be given will be less than the maximum number of grants. Can be prevented from decreasing.
It should be noted that the maximum number of grants that can be given at the time of the occurrence of a prize for giving a prize for the game in the special game state is the value of the game value that may be given when the prize is awarded in the special game state. The largest number of gaming values, for example, when the gaming value can be given more than that in a special gaming state, the number of gaming values is less than the number of gaming values Also good.
In addition, the maximum award with the maximum number of games to be awarded is not limited to the maximum number of games to be awarded when the maximum award is generated independently. Also included are those that are given the maximum number of game values when a plurality of occurrences occur simultaneously (for example, when a plurality of winning lines are provided with a winning winning symbol).
In addition, the specific award winning may be a maximum award winning or a non-maximum award winning.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is an internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is the schematic which shows the wiring connection state of the game control board and the electronic component for games connected to this game control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the structure of the periphery of disconnection monitoring IC in a game control board. (A) is a block diagram which shows the structure of an external output board | substrate, (b) is a figure which shows the structure of the data format of a security signal. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a security signal, (b) (c) is a figure which shows the transmission condition of a security signal. It is a figure which shows a winning combination table. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in a regular bonus, the number of judgment values of each combination, and the winning combination. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel motor. (A) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of starting of a reel motor, (b) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of rotation of a reel motor and a stop. It is a figure which shows the stop control applied by the stop time as a result of an internal lottery. It is a figure which shows the procedure of the stop control by a table system. It is a figure which shows the procedure of the stop control by a control system. It is a figure which shows the procedure of the stop control by a table + control system. (A) is a figure which shows the comparison order of the priority of the stop position according to the number of sliding frames, (b) is a figure which shows the relationship of the priority of a stop position. It is a figure which shows the structure of a virtual sliding top table. It is a figure which shows an example of the update state of an example of a common stop control table, and the virtual sliding top table at the time of performing stop control by a table + control system. (A) is a timing chart which shows the control condition of a full tank error, (b) is a timing chart which shows the detection condition of a full tank sensor. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. (A) is a figure which shows the selection rate of the frequency | count of falling combination alert | reporting, (b) is a figure which shows the characteristic according to BB production mode. It is a figure which shows the background selection rate in RT (2) effect. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the bonus production performed when a big bonus (4) or a big bonus (5) wins. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between volume adjustment and the progress of a game. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between volume adjustment and the progress of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which CPU of a main control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process performed when CPU of a main control part generate | occur | produces an error. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which CPU of a main control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which CPU of a main control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the sliding frame number setting process which CPU of a main control part performs in a reel rotation process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the sliding frame number update process which CPU of a main control part performs in a sliding frame number setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop position search process which CPU of a main control part performs in a sliding frame number setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of RT process which CPU of a main control part performs in the process at the time of game completion. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop switch process which CPU of a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process (main) performed when CPU of a main control part inputs a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs at the time of starting. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment base for attaching a board | substrate case and a board | substrate case to the housing | casing which makes the main body of a slot machine, and a connector control member. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment base for attaching a board | substrate case and a board | substrate case to the housing | casing which makes the main body of a slot machine, and a connector control member. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the substrate case to the attachment base. It is a principal part expansion perspective view of the attachment side member and connector cap which comprise a connector control member. (A) is AA sectional drawing of FIG. 52, (b) (c) is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the board | substrate case to the attachment base, and also attached the connector cap with respect to the attachment side member. (A) is CC sectional drawing of FIG. 54, (b) is DD sectional drawing of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the mounting base and cover member which comprise a connector control member. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the cover member with respect to the mounting base. (A) is EE sectional drawing of FIG. 57, (b) is FF sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the board | substrate case in the modification 1, and a connector cover. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the connector cover in the modification 1. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the cancellation | release condition of the connector cover in the modification 1. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the cancellation | release condition of the connector cover in the modification 1. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the board | substrate case in the modification 2, and a connector cover. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 2. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 2. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 2. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the board | substrate case in the modification 3, and a connector cover. (A) (b) is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the connector cover in the modification 3. FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the board | substrate case in the modification 4, and a connector cover. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the connector cover in the modification 4. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the connector cover in the modification 4. It is a perspective view which shows the releasing condition of the connector cover in the modification 4. It is a circuit diagram which shows the modification of the structure around the power supply of the main control part in a game control board.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  A slot machine according to a first embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. A slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is rotatable to a housing 2a having an open front surface and a side end of the housing 2a. The front door 2b is pivotally supported.

  Inside the casing 2a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged. 1) are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, a see-through window 3 in which three consecutive symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are provided on the front door 2b. It is arranged so that it can be seen from.

  As shown in FIG. 3, "red 7 (black 7 in the figure)", "blue 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)", "white 7", "replay" are provided on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively. ”,“ Watermelon ”,“ Red cherry (black cherry in the figure) ”,“ Blue cherry (shaded cherry in the figure) ”,“ Bell ”,“ Orange ”, etc. , 21 are drawn each. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is arranged at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 2b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. Further, a backlight (not shown) for irradiating the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and the back surface further has a concealing member for concealing the inside. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front door 2b, a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) are used for one medal. A single bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the bet number, and using a credit, the maximum bet number (a game in this embodiment) among a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the game state within the range. Regardless of the state, the MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting 3), the medal stored as credit and the medal used for setting the bet amount are settled (the medal used for setting the credit and bet number) Is operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, viewing and initialization of game history data relating to the results of games already played, selection switch 56 and decision switch 57 operated when selecting a production mode can be operated by the player Each is provided.

  The front door 2b also displays a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 and a payout display 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning are provided.

  Further, on the front door 2b, a 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 is turned on, a 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set by 2 is turned on, and that 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, a BET switch valid LED 21 is lit to notify that the setting operation of the betting number by the operation of the one-sheet BET switch 5, the two-sheet BET switch 5b and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective (see FIG. 4) In the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L that notify that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective are turned on. , 22C and 22R (see FIG. 4), respectively.

  Inside the front door 2b is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time, and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 on the side of a hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided in the housing 2a or A medal selector having a insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that is inserted from the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the medal insertion unit 4 and selectively flows to the hopper tank 34a side to selectively switch to one of the medal payout exits 9 side. (Not shown) is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L capable of detecting the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as shown in FIG. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 32C for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100 is a stop for selecting whether to enable / disable the stop function that controls the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later. Switch 36a, for selecting the validity / invalidity of the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement processing (processing for returning (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later It functions as an automatic settlement switch 36b, a setting key switch 37 for switching to the setting change mode at the time of startup, a reset switch for canceling the error state and the stop state in normal times, and an internal lottery described later in the setting change mode. A reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of the winning probability (race rate) Power switch 39 is operated to ON / OFF the power is provided.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L6 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In this embodiment, three cards are determined as the prescribed number of bets regardless of the gaming state. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set over the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are straddled. The winning line L2, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L3 set across the symbols lined up to the right, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, The lower line of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L4 set over the symbols arranged in the lower right direction, the lower line of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, the winning line L5 set over the symbols arranged in the middle of the reel 2R, Six types of winning lines L6 set across the symbols arranged in the upper stage of the reel 2L, the lower stage of the reel 2C, and the middle stage of the reel 2R are defined as winning lines.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the winning lines L1 to L4 set across the symbols positioned on a straight line of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are different from the stopping positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages on all reels. And the winning lines L5 and L6 are set across the symbols that are not located on a straight line.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described L1 to L6 are applied as the pay lines. However, even if a pay line that is set across the symbols arranged in the middle stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is added. good. Moreover, although the winning line set over the symbol which is not located on a straight line like L5 and L6 mentioned above is applied, only the winning line set over the symbol located on a straight line is applied. Anyway.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L6. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with a medal payout is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each of the symbol combinations arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game, and when the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. It will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the game state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any activated pay line L1 to L6, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  In addition to the hopper motor 34b, the payout sensor 32C, the full sensor 35a, the stop switch 36a, the automatic settlement switch 36b, the setting key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39, the power board 101 has a front surface. A door open detection switch 25 for detecting the open state of the door 1b is connected.

  On the game control board 40, the above-described single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, insertion medal sensor 31, reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R is connected to the payout sensor 32C, the full sensor 35a, the stop switch 36a, the automatic settlement switch 36b, the setting key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the door opening detection switch 25 described above via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 for controlling the game, random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment) are used. A random number generation circuit 42 for generating, a sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit 44 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 101 , A motor driving circuit 45 that controls the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid driving circuit 46 that controls the driving of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a driving control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power supply voltage supplied to the LED drive circuit 47 and the slot machine 1 to be monitored is monitored. An interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41 when a drop is detected. When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the CPU 41a is not inputted, a reset signal is sent to the CPU 41a. Reset circuit 49 for giving, disconnection monitoring IC 50 for monitoring the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the insertion medal sensor 31 and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90, and others Various devices and circuits are installed.

  The CPU 41a is provided with a plurality of registers (storage areas) for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing. Specifically, A and F registers (flag registers) that mainly store calculation data, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers that store general-purpose data, and data indicating the position of the program being executed PC register to be stored, SP register to store a stack pointer (an address indicating the current position of a stack area to be described later), an R register to store data indicating a memory block of the RAM 41c performing a refresh operation to be described later, and the RAM 41c There are provided IX and IY registers for storing data indicating a reference position when referring to a storage area, and an I register for storing data indicating the position of an interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 includes a signal input terminal DATA, and detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 are input to the input port via the signal input terminal DATA. The input states of these signal input terminals DATA are monitored by the CPU 41a, and the CPU 41a executes a basic process that shifts in stages according to the input states of the signal input terminals DATA, that is, the detection states of various switches.

  In addition, the CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In this embodiment, four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4 can be executed. For each interrupt, a counter mode (signal input from a trigger terminal CLK / TRG provided separately from the signal input terminal DATA) is provided. Can be selected and set between an interrupt mode that generates an external interrupt according to the number of times) and a timer mode (an interrupt mode that generates an internal interrupt according to the number of clock inputs of the CPU 41a).

  In the present embodiment, among the interrupts 1 to 4, interrupt 2 is set to the counter mode, interrupt 3 is set to the timer mode, and interrupts 1 and 4 are unused. The trigger terminal CLK / TRG is connected to the above-described power failure detection circuit 48, and the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 2 in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power failure detection circuit 48, and the power failure described later. Interrupt processing (main) is executed. Further, the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 3 every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment), and performs a timer interruption process (main) described later. Execute. Moreover, although the interrupts 1 and 4 are set to unused, the interrupts 1 and 4 may generate | occur | produce by noise etc. For this reason, when interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the CPU 41a executes an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the original process.

  The CPU 41a is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any one of interrupts 1 to 4, and a plurality of interrupts occurred simultaneously. In this case, interrupts to be executed with priority in the order of interrupts 2, 3, 1, 4 are set. In other words, when interrupt 2 and other interrupts occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 is prioritized and when interrupt 3 and interrupt 1 or 4 occur simultaneously, interrupt 3 is prioritized. To run.

  Further, the CPU 41a temporarily stores the data in use stored in the register in a later-described stack area provided in the RAM 41c at the start of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any of the interrupts 1 to 4. The data saved in the stack area at the end of the interrupt process is returned to the register.

  As the RAM 41c, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) is used, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 41a is provided with the above-described R (refresh) register for performing this refresh operation. The R register consists of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b, and the value is updated every execution time of one instruction. .

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It is like that.

  Further, the CPU 41a acquires the state of the stop switch 36a and the automatic checkout switch 36b at the time of activation, and sets the enable / disable of the stop function and the enable / disable of the automatic checkout function in a specific register of the CPU 41a. It has become. The states of the stop switch 36a and the automatic checkout switch 36b are acquired only at the time of startup, and the stop / automatic checkout function is enabled / disabled based on the acquired state. Even if the switch 36b is operated, the validity / invalidity of the stoppage and automatic settlement function is not newly set.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number. In this embodiment, 0 to 16383 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are not used as they are extracted by the hardware random number function, but are processed and used by software. Details thereof will be described in detail. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main), and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function).

  The disconnection monitoring IC 50 monitors the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90, and these connection states. If one of these is released, a disconnection flag indicating that these connection states have been released is stored in a storage unit such as an EEPROM (not shown) provided in the disconnection monitoring IC 50. . In response to the disconnection flag confirmation request from the CPU 41a, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 returns whether or not the disconnection flag is stored. At this time, the disconnection flag is cleared if it is stored in the storage unit.

  The disconnection monitoring IC 50 is also supplied with backup power in the event of a power failure. For example, unless the power failure state continues for 2 to 3 days, an electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is performed. Monitoring of the connection state and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 can be continued.

  The CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected with the selection switch 56 and the determination switch 57 described above, and detection signals of these connected switches are input.

  The production control board 90 is connected with electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), production effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 arranged on the front door 2b of the slot machine 1. The electrical components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d. The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 for effect control and an effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the connected liquid crystal display 51, an LED LED circuit 93 that controls driving of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, and a power source A reset circuit 95 that provides a reset signal to the CPU 91a when the initialization command from the CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, or a switch detection circuit 96 that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the effect control board 90; Clock device 97 for outputting time information including date information and time information, slot A power interruption detection circuit 98 that monitors a power supply voltage supplied to the machine 1 and outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the sub-control unit 91 when a voltage drop is detected, and other circuits are mounted. The CPU 91a receives the command transmitted from the game control board 40 and the detection of the switches connected to the effect control board 90, and performs various controls for performing the effect. Each part of the mounted control circuit is controlled directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). An interrupt terminal (not shown) of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, among the command transmission lines. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. The CPU 91a executes a timer interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval.

  The interrupt terminal (not shown) of the CPU 91a is connected to the power interruption detection circuit 98 described above, and the CPU 91a generates an interrupt in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98. Then, a power interruption interruption process (sub) described later is executed. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Unlike the CPU 41a, the CPU 91a executes interrupt processing based on interrupts other than the interruption interrupt processing (sub) when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal (INT). Even if it is in the middle, interrupt the corresponding process and execute the command reception interrupt process, and execute the command reception interrupt process with the highest priority even if other interrupts except the power interruption interrupt process (sub) occur at the same time It is supposed to be. Note that interrupts other than interrupts based on the input of the strobe signal (INT) are prohibited during execution of interrupt processes other than the power interruption interrupt process (sub). On the other hand, in the interruption interrupt processing (sub), other interruption processing including command reception interruption processing is prohibited at all, and even if other interruptions occur at the same time, interruption interruption processing (Sub) is executed with the highest priority.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained. It has become.

  Next, details of wiring connection states between the game control board 40 and various game electronic components connected to the game control board 40 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing a wiring connection state between the game control board 40 and the game electronic components connected to the game control board 40.

  As described above, on the game control board 40, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the insertion medal sensor 31, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and the reel sensor 33L. 33C, 33R, a hopper motor 34b, a payout sensor 34c, and an effect control board 90 are connected.

  As shown in FIG. 5, among these, one BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, insertion medal sensor 31, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel sensor 33L, The 33C and 33R, the hopper motor 34b, and the payout sensor 34c are electronic components that input and output signals related to the progress of the game to the game control board 40. The signal related to the progress of the game is, for example, an operation for setting the number of bets to make the game startable, an operation for starting the game, or an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such as signals output to the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game, detection of inserted medals, detection of the reference position of the reels, detection of the payout medals, etc., output from the game electronic components in accordance with the progress of the game And a signal input to the game control board 40, a drive signal for driving the reels 2L, 2C, 2R according to the detection of the start operation, and a hopper for paying out medals when a winning occurs. A signal that is output from the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game and that is input to the game electronic component.

  These gaming electronic components are a first electronic component that outputs a signal to the game control board 40 as the game progresses, and a second that receives a signal from the game control board 40 as the game progresses. And electronic components.

  Specifically, the single bet switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 that are operated when setting the bet number and the inserted medal sensor 31 that detects a medal inserted to set the bet number are the operation or the medal of the medal. This is a first electronic component that outputs a BET signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection. Since the main control unit 41 performs the betting number setting process based on the reception of the BET signal, the betting number cannot be set without these electronic components. That is, since the game cannot be started unless the bet number is set, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are electronic components for games necessary for the progress of the game.

  The start switch 7 that detects an operation for starting a game is a first electronic component that outputs a start signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the operation. Since the main control unit 41 performs a process for starting the game (reel rotation process or the like) based on the reception of the start signal, the game cannot be started without this electronic component. That is, the start switch 7 is a game electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  Stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that detect an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are first electronic components that output a stop signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the operation. is there. The main control unit 41 performs processing for deriving the display result by stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on the reception of the stop signal. The display result of cannot be derived. That is, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are first electronic components that output a detection signal for the reference position of the reel to the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 does not have this electronic component because it performs processing to stop rotation by grasping the positions of the symbols of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on reception of the detection signal of the reference position of the reel. In addition, derivation of display results of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, determination of winning, etc. cannot be performed. That is, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  The payout sensor 32 </ b> C that detects a medal to be paid out when a winning is generated is a first electronic component that outputs a medal payout signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the medal. The main control unit 41 performs a payout process for paying out the number of medals according to the generated prize based on the reception of the payout medal detection signal. Therefore, the number of medals according to the number of prizes generated without this electronic component. Cannot be paid out. That is, the payout sensor 35 is a game electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R that rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are second electronic components to which a drive signal output from the game control board 40 is input. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on the input of the drive signal output from the game control board 40 and start the symbol variation display. Even if the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not actually rotated based on the above, the main control unit 41 receives the signals from the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R after outputting the reel drive signals. The game can be controlled to proceed as the reel rotates. However, the timing at which signals are input to the game control board 40 from the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R is an error unless the reel drive signal is output. In order to measure the output timing of the signal based on the detection of the rotation of the reel, a reel drive signal is required. That is, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  The hopper motor 34b that drives the hopper tank that pays out medals is a second electronic component that receives a drive signal output from the game control board 40 in response to a winning. The hopper motor 34b performs a medal payout operation based on the input of a drive signal output from the game control board 40, but even if the medal payout operation is not actually performed based on the signal input. The main control unit 41 can control to advance the game on the assumption that a medal has been paid out by inputting a signal from the payout sensor 32C after outputting a drive signal of the hopper motor 34b. However, the timing at which a signal is input from the payout sensor 32C to the game control board 40 is an error unless the drive signal of the hopper motor 34b is output. In order to measure the output timing of the signal based on the detection of this, a drive signal for the hopper motor 34b is required. That is, the hopper motor 34b is a gaming electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  These gaming electronic components are basically electronic components that are continuously used in common with multiple models, and there are few opportunities to remove them from the main unit unless a failure occurs. It is fixed in place. On the other hand, the game control board 40, the effect control board 90, and the like need to be replaced when changing the model, and are removed from the main body at that time. That is, when removing the game control board 40, it is necessary to release the connection with the game electronic parts, so the game electronic parts and the game control board 40 are connected via the relay board. The boards and the board and the game electronic component are connected via a cable. The cable and the board are electrically connected by connecting a cable-side connector provided at an end of the cable and a board-side connector that is electrically connected to the wiring pattern of the board.

  More specifically, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are connected to the game control board 40 via the operation unit relay board 110. The reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected to the game control board 40 via the reel relay board 120, and the hopper motor 34b and the payout sensor 32C are connected via the power supply board 101. Thus, the game control board 40 is connected to the game control board 40, and the effect control board 90 is connected to the game control board 40 via the effect relay board 80.

  The operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 are provided with wiring patterns (not shown) for connecting the game control board 40 and each electronic component. The detection signal output from the component to the game control board 40 or the power or signal supplied (input) from the game control board 40 can be relayed.

  In addition, the various electronic components and the game control board 40 are thus connected via the relay boards 110, 120, 100, and 80 attached to predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1 (the casing 2a in this embodiment). By wiring connection, it becomes easy to collect wiring from the game control board 40 to a plurality of electronic components individually arranged at predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1, and the connector connection portion is always connected to the relay board or game control. Since it is provided on the substrate 40, and the connector connecting portions of the respective electronic components are thereby fixed, it is possible to prevent a connector connecting portion from being searched for during wiring connection work or to make a mistake in the type of wiring to be connected. .

  The game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 are connected via a cable 600a, and the game control board 40 and the reel relay board 120 are connected via a cable 600b, and the game control board 40 and the power supply board 101 are connected to each other. Are connected via a cable 600c, and the effect control board 90 and the effect relay board 80 are connected via a cable 600d.

  The operation unit relay board 110 and the single BET switch 5 are connected via a cable 601a, and the operation unit relay board 110 and the MAXBET switch 6 are connected via a cable 601b, and the operation unit relay board 110 and the start switch 7 are connected to each other. Are connected via a cable 601c, the operation part relay board 110 and the stop switch 8L are connected via a cable 601d, and the operation part relay board 110 and the stop switch 8C are connected via a cable 601e. The board 110 and the stop switch 8R are connected via a cable 601f, and the operation unit relay board 110 and the inserted medal sensor 31 are connected via a cable 601g.

  The reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32L are connected via a cable 601h, the reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32C are connected via a cable 601j, and the reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32R are connected to a cable 601l. Connected through. The reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33L are connected via a cable 601i, the reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33C are connected via a cable 601k, and the reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33L are connected to a cable 601m. Connected through. The power supply board 101 and the hopper motor 34 are connected via a cable 601n, the power supply board 101 and the payout sensor 35 are connected via a cable 601o, and the effect relay board 80 and the effect control board 90 are connected with a cable 601p. Connected through.

  Each of these cables 600a to 600c and 601a to 601o is connected to each board by a connector so that the wiring connection with the board can be released. Specifically, cable-side connectors 610a and 611a are provided at both ends of the cable 600a. One cable-side connector 610a is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620a fixed to the game control board 40. The other cable side connector 611a is a connector that can be connected to the board side connector 621a fixed to the operation unit relay board 110. Cable side connectors 610b and 611b are provided at both ends of the cable 600b. One cable side connector 610b is a connector that can be connected to the board side connector 620b fixed to the game control board 40, and the other side. The cable-side connector 611b is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621b fixed to the reel relay board 120. Cable-side connectors 610c and 611c are provided at both ends of the cable 600c. One cable-side connector 610c is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620c fixed to the game control board 40. The cable-side connector 611c is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621c fixed to the power supply board 101. Cable-side connectors 610d and 611d are provided at both ends of the cable 600d. One cable-side connector 610d is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620d fixed to the game control board 40, and the other The cable-side connector 611d is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621d fixed to the effect relay board 80.

  Further, a cable-side connector 612 a that can be connected to a board-side connector 622 a fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided at the other end of the cable 601 a that has one end connected to the BET switch 5. At the other end of the cable 601b whose one end is connected to the MAXBET switch 6, a cable-side connector 612b that can be connected to the board-side connector 622b fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601c whose one end is connected to the start switch 7, a cable-side connector 612c that can be connected to the board-side connector 622c fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601d, one end of which is connected to the stop switch 8L, a cable side connector 612d that can be connected to the board side connector 622d fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601e whose one end is connected to the stop switch 8C, a cable-side connector 612e that can be connected to the board-side connector 622e fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601f whose one end is connected to the stop switch 8R, a cable-side connector 612f that can be connected to the board-side connector 622f fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. A cable-side connector 612g that can be connected to a board-side connector 622g fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided at the other end of the cable 601g that has one end connected to the inserted medal sensor 31.

  Further, the other end of the cable 601h whose one end is connected to the reel motor 32L and the other end of the cable 601i whose one end is connected to the reel sensor 33L can be connected to the board-side connector 622h fixed to the reel relay board 120. A cable-side connector 612h is provided. One end of the cable 601j connected to the reel motor 32C and the other end of the cable 601k connected to the reel sensor 33C are connected to the board-side connector 622i fixed to the reel relay board 120. A side connector 612i is provided. A cable that can be connected to the board-side connector 622j fixed to the reel relay board 120 at the other end of the cable 601l having one end connected to the reel motor 32R and the other end of the cable 601m having one end connected to the reel sensor 33R. A side connector 612j is provided.

  Further, the other end of the cable 601n whose one end is connected to the hopper motor 34b and the other end of the cable 601o whose one end is connected to the payout sensor 32C can be connected to the board-side connector 622k fixed to the power supply board 101. A cable-side connector 612k is provided.

  In addition, cable-side connectors 612p and 613p are provided at both ends of the cable 601p. One cable-side connector 612p is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 622p fixed to the game control board 40. The other cable side connector 613p is a connector that can be connected to the board side connector 623p fixed to the effect control board 90.

  In this embodiment, the wiring is extended from each electronic component without using a connector, but may be connected to the wiring through a connector.

  As described above, each board and each cable includes board-side connectors 620a to 620d, 621a to 621d, 622a to 622k, 622p, and 623p provided on the board side, and cable-side connectors 610a to 610d provided on the cable side. Wiring is connected through a pair of connectors (male connector and female connector) consisting of 611a to 611d, 612a to 612k, 612p, and 613p, and the wiring connection is released by removing the cable side connector from the board side connector. Can be done. In particular, the game control board 40, the operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power board 101, and the effect control board 90 are attached to predetermined positions on the casing or front door of the slot machine 1, so that the board side Since the cable side connector can be easily removed from the connector, the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 can be easily replaced.

  First, the first electronic component will be described in detail. One of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, or the connector of a cable provided between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is driven into a connector. When the BET signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40, the bet number is set without performing the main control unit 41 even though the bet number setting operation is not performed. There is a risk of being. When a connector of a driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of a cable provided between the start switch 7 and the game control board 40, and a start signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40 There is a possibility that the game is started without performing the game start operation. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40, and the stop signal is illegally transmitted from the driving tool to the game control board 40. If output, the rotation of the reel may be stopped without performing a stop operation. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R and the game control board 40, and the reel rotation signal is illegal from the driving tool to the game control board 40. Is output to the reels 2L, 2C and 2R without rotating the reels, there is a risk that the display result of each reel, determination of winning, etc. may be performed. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the payout sensor 32C and the game control board 40, and a medal payout signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40. There is a possibility that the medals are counted without paying out medals.

  The second electronic component will be described in detail. The game control board 40 is released by disconnecting one of the connectors of the cable provided between the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the game control board 40. When the driving signal output from the game control board 40 can be acquired by the driving tool, the timing at which the driving signal of the reel is output from the game control board 40 can be specified on the driving tool side, so game control is originally performed from the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R There is a possibility that the reel rotation detection signal input to the substrate 40 may be output from the driving tool at an appropriate timing after the reel rotation. In addition, the drive signal output from the game control board 40 after the connection at any of the connectors of the cable provided between the hopper motor 34b and the game control board 40 is released can be obtained by a driving tool or the like. Then, since the timing at which the driving signal of the hopper tank is output from the game control board 40 can be specified on the driving instrument side, the payout medal detection signal originally input from the payout sensor 35 to the game control board 40 is sent from the driving tool to the hopper tank. May be output at an appropriate timing after driving.

  As described above, when a signal output from the first electronic component according to the progress of the game and originally input to the game control board 40 is output from the driving tool, the main control unit 41 receives the signal. The game can be controlled based on the game, and a signal that is output from the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game and is originally input to the second electronic component is input to the driving tool. In this case, on the driving instrument side, the main control unit 41 can specify the output timing of the signal output after driving the reel motor or the hopper motor, and when a new signal is input to the main control board 40 based on this. Since the main control unit 41 can perform control to advance the game based on the reception of the signal, an illegal act such as automatically progressing the game. There is a possibility to be implemented. Therefore, in this embodiment, various measures are taken to prevent illegal acts caused by the connection of the driving tool. These measures will be described in detail later.

  Next, a configuration around the disconnection monitoring IC 50 in the game control board 40 will be described.

  The game control board 40 is supplied with + 5V DC voltage generated by the voltage generation circuit of the power supply board 101. The + 5V DC voltage supplied from the power supply board 101 is supplied to the power supply terminal (VDD) as a drive power supply for the disconnection monitoring IC 50, and also branches on the game control board 40 as shown in FIG. 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 via the cable 600a, the operation unit relay board 110, the operation unit relay board 110 and the insertion medal sensor 31 via the cable 601g, and then folded back by the insertion medal sensor 31, Returning to the game control board 40 via the cable 601g, the operation unit relay board 110, and the cable 600a, and further connecting the game control board 40 and the production relay board 80 to the cable 600d, the production relay board 80, and the production relay board 80 Via the cable 601p for wiring and connecting the effect control board 90, the effect control board 90 is further turned back. Te, cable 601P, directing the relay board 80, so that via the cable 600d to return to the game controller board 40 again, is input as a connection signal to the input terminal disconnection monitoring IC50 (IN).

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the board-side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable-side connector 610a of the cable 600a are connected, and the cable-side connector 611a of the cable 600a and the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 are connected. The connection of the board side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612g of the cable 601g, the connection of the board side connector 620d of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610d of the cable 600d, and the cable side connector of the cable 600d 611d and the board-side connector 621d of the production relay board 80, the board-side connector 622p of the production relay board 80 and the cable-side connector 612p of the cable 601p, the cable-side connector 613p of the cable 601p and the production control board The connection signal input to the input terminal (IN) of the disconnection monitoring IC 50 is cut off by releasing any one of the connection to the board-side connector 623p of 0, and thus the disconnection monitoring IC 50 is connected to the game control board. 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the disconnection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are detected. That is, when the connection between the connectors between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the connection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are released even at one place, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 detects the disconnection. It has come to be.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, the + 5V DC voltage supplied from the power supply board 101 branches on the game control board 40 and is connected to the ground level on the power supply board 101 side. A capacitor C1 is provided. D1 is a diode for preventing backflow. As a result, a DC voltage of +5 V can be stored in the capacitor C1, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off, the voltage stored in the capacitor C1 can be supplied as a backup power source for driving the disconnection monitoring IC 50. Thus, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 can detect disconnection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 regardless of whether it is during energization or during a power failure. It has become.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the CPU 41a, and the information providing terminal board of the game store (hall) where the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. 1010 is output to a hall device such as a hall computer.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state Is an RB signal indicating that a regular bonus is described later, a BB signal indicating that the gaming state is a big bonus described later, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is opened, and a setting change mode described later. A setting change signal indicating transition, a throwing error signal indicating abnormality of the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating abnormality of the hopper unit 34 are output.

  In this embodiment, there is no challenge time (a gaming state where the number of sliding pieces on the reel is limited, but winning is allowed for all small roles) and a challenge bonus with a high probability of challenge time. However, in order to make common with the slot machines equipped with these gaming states, in addition to the signal lines for outputting the above signals, the gaming state is a challenge between the gaming control board 40 and the external output board 1000. A signal line for outputting a CT signal indicating that the time is in progress and a CB signal indicating that the gaming state is in the challenge bonus is connected, and a signal line for error output that may be expanded in the future is connected. Has been.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010. ing.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal, CB signal) are directly used as pulse signals via the relay circuit 1001. The information is output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  On the other hand, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a (preliminary signal) are security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002. And output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal, CB signal) output from the external output board 1000 are output to the hall device via the information providing terminal board 1010. . On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is again converted into a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a spare signal at the information providing terminal board 1010 and output to the hall device. Will be.

  The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 converts the door opening signal, setting change signal, input error signal, payout error signal, (preliminary signal) into a serial signal in the data format shown in FIG. Output. The basic format consists of a pulse width of 20 ms and a frame length of 7 bits. The first bit is a start bit indicating the start of data, the last bit is a stop bit indicating the end of data, and D1 to D5 in between are transmission data. Become. The start bit is 1 (on) and the stop bit is 0 (off). D1 is a bit indicating the output state of the door opening signal. If 1 (on), it indicates a door opening signal on (when the front door 1b is open), and if it is 0 (off), the door opening signal off. Indicates. D2 is a bit indicating the output state of the setting change signal. If 1 (on), D2 indicates the setting change signal on (moving to the setting change mode), and 0 (off) indicates the setting change signal off. . D3 is a bit indicating the output state of the insertion error signal. If it is 1 (on), it indicates the insertion error signal on (it is highly likely that the medal selector has been cheated), and 0 (off). Indicates a throw error signal off. D4 is a bit indicating the output state of the payout error signal. If it is 1 (on), it indicates a payout error signal on (there is a high possibility that fraud has been performed on the hopper unit 34), and 0 (off). If there is, a payout error signal off is indicated. D5 is a bit indicating the output state of the spare signal, and is always 0 in this embodiment. For example, if the door opening signal is on and the setting change signal is on, as shown in FIG. 8A, start bits: 1, D1: 1, D2: 1, D3: 0, D4: 0, D5 : 0, stop bit: 0. If the setting change signal changes to OFF after this state, the start bit is 1, D1: 1, D2: 0, D3: 0, D4: 0, D5: 0, and the stop bit is 0. .

  The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 changes the output state of the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, the paying error signal, and the (preliminary signal), that is, when any event occurs or the event occurs. When is restored, a frame indicating the changed state is repeatedly transmitted three times.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, an interval of 240 ms is provided between the start bit and the start bit so as not to cause erroneous latching on the receiving side. That is, after the stop bit, a 100 ms blank is left and the start bit of the next frame is transmitted.

  If the door open signal, the setting change signal, the input error signal, the payout error signal, and the (preliminary signal) output state are changed without completing the three repetitive transmissions, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, a frame indicating the output state after the change is repeatedly transmitted three times from the next frame. At this time, there is no transmission of a new frame in the middle of frame output, or transmission of a new frame without a 100 ms blank after the stop bit. After a 100 ms blank, a new frame is transmitted, so that the reception side can reliably latch the head of the frame.

  Also, when any signal among the door opening signal, setting change signal, closing error signal, payout error signal, and (preliminary signal) changes from the on state to the off state, only the start bit is set to 1. The frame is transmitted three times.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 detects a voltage drop signal, the power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed. In the power interruption interrupt processing (main), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and the data for destructive diagnosis (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1 in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, that is, In addition to storing specific data other than 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. ing. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis On the condition that the data value is also correct, the processing state of the CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c. If the data value is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and a RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error, thereby disabling the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until

  In addition, the CPU 41a determines whether or not the bet number set in the internal lottery process described later is a bet number according to the gaming state, and whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is an appropriate value. judge.

  Even when the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, or when the set value used for the internal lottery is not an appropriate value, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the RAM abnormal error code is set and the RAM is set. The game is controlled to an abnormal error state and the progress of the game is disabled. As described above, unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game state includes a regular bonus, a normal game state, RT (1) (replay time (1)), and RT (2) (replay time (2)). Even in the state, 3 is defined as the prescribed number of bets. Therefore, regardless of whether the gaming state is a regular bonus, a normal gaming state, RT (1), or RT (2), the game is played when 3 is set as the bet number. It is possible to start. In this embodiment, all the pay lines L1 to L6 are activated when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state are set, and the number of bets regardless of the gaming state. As a result, all winning lines L1 to L6 are activated at the time when 3 is set.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line). When a combination of symbols called a combination is arranged on the winning line, a winning is achieved. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes. Of special bonuses, Big Bonus (4) and Big Bonus (5), which will be described later, are always won in the winning game, and are not carried over after the next game.

  FIG. 9 shows a winning combination table. The winning combination table is stored in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41 in advance, and the combination numbers (0 to 22) assigned in the order in which the lottery is performed corresponding to the combination of combinations and combinations to be selected in the internal drawing. ) Is registered.

  In the slot machine 1, as special roles, a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a big bonus (3), a big bonus (4), and a big bonus (5) are red cherry, blue, Cherry, white cherry, and bell are defined as replay (1) and replay (2). In addition, the combination of the roles in the slot machine 1 includes big bonus (1) + red cherry, big bonus (2) + red cherry, big bonus (3) + red cherry, big bonus (1) + blue cherry, big bonus. (2) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry, Bell + Red Cherry, Bell + Blue cherry, bell + white cherry are stipulated. That is, the total number of combinations and combinations of combinations is 23.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, a role to be selected by lottery depending on whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2), or a regular bonus. And combinations of roles are different. In particular, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2), whether or not any special role is being carried over (the fact that any special role has been elected to the winning flag of the special role) Depending on whether or not is already set, the combination and combination of combinations that are subject to the lottery vary.

  In this embodiment, a state number corresponding to the gaming state is assigned, and when performing an internal lottery, a state number corresponding to the current gaming state is set, and a lottery object is selected according to the state number and the number of bets. Can be identified. Specifically, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “0” is set as the state number, and when no special combination is carried over at RT (1), the state is set. If “1” is set as the number and no special combination is carried over in RT (2), “2” is set as the state number and any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state. If the status number is set to “3” and any special combination is carried over in RT (2), the status number is set to “4” and the bonus is a regular bonus. Is set to "5" as the state number. As will be described later, since RT (1) ends with the winning of the special role, the special role is not carried over in RT (1).

  As shown in FIG. 9, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2), and no special role is carried over, that is, the state number is “0”, “1” or “ 2 ”is set, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), big bonus (4), big bonus (5), big bonus (1) + red cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry, Replay (1), Replay (2), Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, White Chi Lee, Bell, that is a combination of winning and prize of winning numbers 0 to 19 are subject to internal lottery.

  Further, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or RT (2) and any special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “3” or “4”, the replay ( 1), Replay (2), Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, White Cherry, Bell, that is, a combination of combination numbers 14 to 19 is an object of internal lottery. Further, when the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “5” is set as the state number, bell, bell + red cherry, bell + blue cherry, bell + white cherry, that is, the roles and roles after the role number 19 Are subject to internal lottery.

  The red cherry is awarded when a symbol “red cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out. The blue cherry is awarded when the symbol “blue cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out. The white cherry is awarded when the symbol “white cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out. If the symbols “red cherry”, “blue cherry” or “white cherry” are stopped at the upper or lower stage of the left reel, three winning lines L1, L3, L5 or winning lines L2, L4, L A combination of red cherries, blue cherries or white cherries will be on the winning line, and red cherries, blue cherries or white cherries will be won on the three winning lines, so three medals will be paid out. It becomes.

  The bell is awarded when a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out.

  Replay (1) is awarded when the combination of “replay-replay-replay” is aligned on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). (Replay (2) becomes a winning when the combination of “Bell-Replay-Replay” is arranged in any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). Replay (1) or When Replay (2) wins, there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so there are three medals corresponding to the number of bets that need not be set in the next game. This is essentially the same as being paid out.

  The big bonus is a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7”, “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7”, “white” in any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). When a combination of “7-white 7-white 7”, “bell-replay-bell”, and “replay-replay-bell” is prepared, a prize is awarded. In this embodiment, when the combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is complete, the big bonus that is awarded is the big bonus (1), and the combination of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” is complete. The Big Bonus (2) will be the Big Bonus (2), and the Big Bonus (3) will be awarded when the combination of "White 7-White 7-White 7" is complete. The big bonus that is awarded when the combination of "" is complete is the big bonus (4), and the big bonus that is awarded when the "replay-replay-bell" combination is complete is the big bonus (5).

  When the big bonus (1) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (1), and when the big bonus (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (2) and the big bonus (3) wins. When the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (3) and the big bonus (4) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (4) and when the big bonus (5) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (5 ). When shifting to the big bonus (1) to (5), the shift to the regular bonus is performed simultaneously with the shift to the big bonus (1) to (5). The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the big bonuses (1) to (5) are not finished when the regular bonus is finished, the process proceeds to the regular bonus again and is controlled to the regular bonus repeatedly until the big bonuses (1) to (5) are finished. The That is, during the big bonuses (1) to (5), the regular bonus is always controlled.

  The big bonuses (1) to (3) are terminated when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonuses (1) to (3) exceeds 400. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. The big bonus (4) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus (4) exceeds 300, and the big bonus (5) The process ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player exceeds 100. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied.

  While the gaming state is the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), big bonus (4), big bonus (5), the big bonus (1) medium flag, big bonus (2 ) A medium flag, a big bonus (3) medium flag, a big bonus (4) medium flag, and a big bonus (5) medium flag are set in the RAM 41c.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired as described later. And, for each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state and the number of bets, the combination of the random numbers for internal lottery acquired and combinations of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value This is performed according to the number of determination values. In this embodiment, from the number of judgment values of each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination, and a range of determination values for winning the combination of general combination and special combination. And the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general combination and a special combination may be won simultaneously in one game. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are exclusively drawn.

  Each combination and combination of combinations determined according to the gaming state and the number of bets are referred to in the order of combination numbers registered in the winning combination table shown in FIG.

  The game state is the normal game state, RT (1) or RT (2), and no special role is carried over, that is, the state number is set to “0”, “1” or “2” In this case, with reference to the winning combination table, combinations of the combination of combination numbers 0 to 19, that is, big bonus (1) [number 0], big bonus (2) [number 1], big bonus (3 ) [Role 2], Big Bonus (4) [Role 3], Big Bonus (5) [Role 4], Big Bonus (1) + Red Cherry [Role 5], Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry [role 6], big bonus (3) red cherry [role 7], big bonus (1) + blue cherry [role 8], big bonus (2) + blue cherry [role 9], big bonus (3) + blue cheri [Position Number 10], Big Bonus (1) + White Cherry [Position Number 11], Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry [Position Number 12], Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry [Position Number 13], Replay ( 1) [Hand number 14], Replay (2) [Hand number 15], Red cherry [Hand number 16], Blue cherry [Hand number 17], White cherry [Hand number 18], Bell [Hand number 19] It is sequentially read out as the target combination of the lottery.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state or RT (2) and any special combination is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “3” or “4”, the winning combination table is displayed. Referring to the roles of role numbers 14 to 19, that is, replay (1) [role number 14], replay (2) [role number 15], red cherry [role number 16], blue cherry [role number 17], white cherry [Position number 18] and bell [Position number 19] are sequentially read out as a target combination for internal lottery.

  When the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “5” is set as the state number, the winning combination table is referred to, and the combination of the combination numbers 19 to 22, that is, bell [port number 19], bell + red cherry [ Role number 20], bell + blue cherry [portion number 21], bell [port number 22] are sequentially read out as target lotteries for internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, when the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles and the state number indicating the current gaming state for the internal lottery are sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and the result of the addition overflows In addition, it is determined that the combination or combination of combinations is won.

  When a winning combination of any combination or combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of winning combination or combination determined is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c. Set. The internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the special role winning flag is set, and the lower byte is general. It is assigned as a general role storage work in which a winning flag for a role is set. Specifically, when any of the roles 0 to 4 (special role) is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, and the general role is stored. Clear the winning flag set for the workpiece. In addition, when any of the combination numbers 5 to 13 (special combination + general combination) is won, the special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is selected is set in the special combination storing work. A winning combination flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If any of the combination numbers 14 to 22 (general combination) is won, a general combination winning flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  The number of determination values of each combination and combination of combinations is read according to the storage address of the number of determination values registered in a role-specific table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41.

  The number of determination values may be 256 or more, and cannot be stored in one byte. Therefore, each determination value number is registered using a storage area of two bytes. In addition, the number of determination values is registered corresponding to the above-described state number and bet number that can specify the gaming state. Even for the same combination or combination of the same combination, the winning probability may vary depending on the gaming state, and the winning probability may differ depending on the number of bets even if the gaming state is the same. Because there is. The number of determination values may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  Also, the number of medals to be paid out when winning each winning combination is registered in the role-specific table. However, only the red cherries, blue cherries, white cherries, and bells are eligible for paying out medals when winning a prize. The big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), big bonus (4), big bonus (5) wins are accompanied by a transition of the gaming state and are not eligible for payout of medals. . In replay, there is no payout of medals, but it is not necessary to insert medals for setting the number of bets in the next game (the normal game state or RT (1) to (3)). Or it is the same as paying out 3 cards.

  10 to 12 are diagrams illustrating an example of a relationship between a random number value for internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination and combination of combinations, and winning. In FIG. 10, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), in FIG. 11, any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (2). FIG. 12 shows an example when the player is in the regular bonus. 10 to 12 show examples in which the set value is 6.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the big bonus (3), the big bonus (4), Big Bonus (5), Big Bonus (1) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Blue Cherry Big Bonus (3) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry, Replay (1), Replay (2), Red Cherry, Blue cherries, white cherries, and bells are eligible for internal lottery. Further, in this embodiment, with the set value 6, the number of determination values of each combination when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state is 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8 , 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 2236, 1, 300, 300, 300, and 1392 are registered, and the big bonus (1) that is the target of the internal lottery is the number of judgment values. The winning result is obtained when 16376 to 16383, in which the addition result overflows by adding 8, is acquired as a random number for internal lottery.

  Next, the big bonus (2) that is the subject of the internal lottery is obtained by adding 16 which is the sum of the judgment value number 8 of the big bonus (1) and the judgment value number 8 of the big bonus (2). The winning combination is obtained when 16368 to 16375, which will overflow, are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery. Similarly, big bonus (3) is obtained when 16360-16367 is obtained as a random number for internal lottery, and big bonus (4) is obtained when 16352-16359 is obtained as a random number for internal lottery. Bonus (5) is a big bonus when 16344-16351 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and Big Bonus (1) + red cherry is a big bonus when 16336-16343 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. (2) + red cherry is obtained when 16328-16335 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and big bonus (3) + red cherry is acquired when 16320-16327 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. For Big Bonus (1) + Blue Cherry, 1631 to 16319 were acquired as random numbers for internal lottery In the case of big bonus (2) + blue cherry, 16304 to 16311 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, and in big bonus (3) + blue cherry, 16296 to 16303 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery. When the big bonus (1) + white cherry is acquired as a random number for internal lottery 16288-16295, the big bonus (2) + white cherry is obtained as a random number for internal lottery 16280-16287 When acquired, Big Bonus (3) + Blue Cherry is acquired as random numbers for internal lottery 16272-16279, and Replay (1) is acquired as random numbers for internal lottery 14036-16271 When replay (2) is performed, 140140 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. When 13735-14034 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, when blue cherry is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, 134335-13434, when white cherry is 13135-13434 for internal lottery When acquired as a random number, the bell is determined to be a winner when 11743-13134 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery. When 0 to 11742 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  The approximate winning probability of each combination and combination of combinations calculated based on the number of determination values is as follows: big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), big bonus (4), big bonus (5), Big Bonus (1) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (3) Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry, Replay (1), Replay (2), Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048 for white cherry and bell 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1 / 7.33, 1/16384, 1 / 54.6, 1 / 54.6, 1 / 54.6, and 1 / 1.77.

  Also, when no special role is carried over in RT (1), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), big bonus (4), big bonus (5), Big Bonus (1) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry, Replay (1), Replay (2), Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, White Cherry, The bell is subject to internal lottery, and in this embodiment, when the special value is not carried over at RT (1) at the set value 6 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 12000, 280, 300, 300, 300, 1392 The approximate winning probabilities for each role are 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048. 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1 / 1.37, 1/280, 1/300, 1/300, 1/300, 1 / 1.11.77, The winning probabilities for Replay (1) and Replay (2) are both higher than when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state.

  Also, when no special role is carried over in RT (2), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), big bonus (4), big bonus (5), Big Bonus (1) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry, Replay (1), Replay (2), Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, White Cherry, The bell is subject to internal lottery, and in this example, when the special value is not carried over at RT (2) at the set value 6 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 13880, 20, 300, 300, 300, 1392, respectively, The approximate winning probabilities for each role are 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048. 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1 / 1.18, 1 / 819.2, 1/300, 1/300, 1/300, 1 / 1.11.77 Thus, the winning probability of replay (1) is further increased as compared to the case where no special combination is carried over in RT (1), but the winning probability of replay (2) is lowered. Still, the winning probability of replay (2) is higher than when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, replay (1), replay (2), red cherry, blue cherry, white cherry, and bell are subject to internal lottery. In this embodiment, 2236, 1, 324, 324, 324, and 1392 are registered as the number of judgment values for each combination when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state at the setting value 6. The approximate winning probabilities for each role are 1 / 7.33, 1/16384, 1 / 50.6, 1 / 50.6, 1 / 50.6, 1 / 1.11.77, If no special role is carried over in the game state, the combination of special roles and special roles including special roles that are subject to internal lottery will be excluded from the internal lottery, special role + red cherry, Compared to the case where the winning probabilities of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry alone are not carried over in the normal gaming state, because the winning probability of another role + blue cherry, special role + white cherry is reduced. The other winning probabilities are the same as when no special roles are carried over in the normal gaming state.

  In addition, if any special role is carried over in RT (2), Replay (1), Replay (2), Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, White Cherry, and Bell are subject to internal lottery and this implementation In the example, 13600, 280, 324, 324, 324, and 1392 are registered as the number of determination values of each combination when any special combination is carried over in RT (2) at the setting value 6. , The approximate winning probabilities for each role are 1 / 1.20, 1 / 58.51, 1 / 50.6, 1 / 50.6, 1 / 50.6, 1 / 1.11.77, and RT ( 2) If any special role is not carried over, the combination of special roles and special roles including special roles that are the targets of internal lottery will be excluded from the internal lottery, special roles + red cherry, special roles + Blue -The winning probability of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry alone is higher than when no special role is carried over in RT (2) because the winning probability of special role + white cherry is reduced. The other winning probabilities are the same as when no special combination is carried over in RT (2).

  As shown in FIG. 12, the regular bonus is subject to the bell, red cherry + bell, blue cherry + bell, white cherry + bell, and internal lottery. 14750, 324, 324, and 324 are registered as the number of determination values, and the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 1.11, 1 / 50.6, 1 / 50.6, 1 / In regular bonuses, Bell, Red Cherry + Bell, Blue Cherry + Bell, White Cherry + Bell, which are not subject to internal lottery in the normal gaming state and RT (1), RT (2), are internal lottery. It becomes the object of.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are, for example, hybrid type stepping motors, and include a stator 32b and a rotor 32a facing the stator 32b. The rotor 32a has a large number of gear-shaped salient poles (not shown), and permanent magnets magnetized in the same direction as the rotation shaft are incorporated therein. These reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R receive a pulse signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on the control of the CPU 41a, and each excitation phase φ1 to φ4 of the stator 32b is excited according to a predetermined procedure to generate one pulse. The rotor 32a is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step) every time it is received.

  FIG. 14A is a timing chart showing a control method when starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. In the figure, φ1 to φ4 indicate each excitation phase, “ON” indicates an excitation state, and “OFF” indicates a demagnetization state. When starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the CPU 41a starts excitation in the rotational direction by a 1-2 phase excitation method, which will be described later, starting from the state where only the stop phase is excited. Specifically, for example, when the stop phase is (φ3), φ1 to φ4 are changed in the order of (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1). Excited alternately in 2 phase, 1 phase and 2 phase.

  If excitation is started with a phase different from the stop phase as a starting point, the excitation phase is suddenly attracted to the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a, and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation. In the present embodiment, since the excitation is started from the stop phase as a starting point, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a starts smoothly.

  FIG. 14B is a timing chart showing a control method during rotation and stop of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R.

  First, during the rotation, that is, until the condition for stopping the reel is satisfied, the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For example, a pulse signal indicating excitation of φ1 to φ4 is turned ON / OFF at the timing shown in FIG. 14B, and (φ4, φ1), (φ1), (φ1,. (φ2), (φ2), (φ2, φ3), (φ3), (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1)... in this order, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by exciting the Φ1 to Φ4 alternately for each phase and rotating the rotor 32a.

  Next, when the condition for stopping the rotating reel is satisfied, that is, when the rotor 32a steps out by an overshoot amount described later, an angle at which the symbol (target symbol) selected by the stop operation can be derived and displayed. When the angle position reaches the position (target stop angle position), the process shifts to the reel stop control from the excited state of the two phases. For example, when the condition for stopping the reel is established in the period shown in FIG. 14B as the stop condition establishment step, the process proceeds to stop control after waiting until time Ta when the two phases are excited. .

  The reel stop control is performed in two stages as indicated by T1 and T2 in FIG. The control performed at T1 is called 2-phase excitation stop control, and the control performed at T2 is called 3-phase excitation stop control.

  The two-phase excitation stop control is started from the time Ta when the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method and the state is changed from the state in which one phase is excited to the state in which two phases are excited. In this control, the excited state is held for a predetermined hold time T1. For example, as shown in FIG. 14B, the state in which (φ1, φ2) is excited is held for the hold time T1 from the time when (φ1, φ2) is excited to the state in which (φ1) is excited. To do. As a result, rapid braking is applied to the rotor 32a of each reel motor that has rotated at a high speed.

  The hold time T1 is determined according to the amount of overshoot that will cause the step-out, and varies depending on the magnitude of the holding torque of the reel motor, the inertia of the rotor 32a, the spring constant, and the like. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the amount of overshoot is four steps of the stepping motor, and the hold time T1 is set as a time required for the reel motor to drive for three steps. Then, the target stop angle position of the rotor 32a is set three steps ahead from the stage where the two-phase excitation stop control is started in accordance with the hold time T1.

  For this reason, at the time Tb when the hold time T1 elapses, the rotor 32a is in a position immediately before the target stop angle position, and the rotation speed is braked. Therefore, the three-phase excitation stop control is started by switching the excitation pattern at time Tb. That is, φ1 is demagnetized, and the stop phase φ3 corresponding to the target stop angle position and the two brake phases φ2 and φ4 located at opposite positions with the stop phase interposed therebetween are excited for a predetermined time T2. Thereby, the rotor 32a stops at the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3, that is, the target stop angle position while obtaining the brakes by the brake phases φ2 and φ4. As a result, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a stops at a target stop position where the target symbol can be derived and displayed without being vibrated accurately.

  After the three-phase excitation stop control is executed during T2, the brake phases φ2 and φ4 are demagnetized, and the motor voltage is changed from H to L while maintaining the excitation state of the stop phase φ3. The reason why the excited state of the stop phase φ3 is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is that the rotor 32a deviates from the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3 due to the phase difference between the holding torque and the detent torque or the deviation due to the effect of friction. It is for preventing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reel from moving finely after being temporarily stopped and the angular position of the rotor 32a when the reel motor is started next time from being shifted from the angular position at the time of stopping.

  As a control method for stopping the reel motor, all-phase excitation stop control, that is, control for stopping the rotor 32a by exciting all excitation phases simultaneously, two-phase excitation stop control, that is, two adjacent Control for stopping the rotor 32a by exciting the excitation phases simultaneously is conventionally known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 61-240846 and 62-36787).

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, in order to smoothly start the reel as described above, it is necessary to specify an accurate stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor.

  However, when the reel motor stop control is performed using the above-described all-phase excitation stop control, the rotor 32a stops after rotating by the amount of overshoot caused by sudden braking. Since the amount of overshoot is determined based on mechanical elements, it is difficult to accurately determine the stop position of the rotor 32a. Therefore, there is a problem in that the above-described smooth reel start cannot be accurately controlled. .

  When the reel motor stop control is performed using the above-described two-phase excitation stop control, the stop position of the rotor 32a converges to the equilibrium point of the two excitation phases finally excited, and the stop Although it is possible to specify the position accurately, there is a problem that the stop mode of the reel becomes unsightly because the vibration associated with the rotor 32a responding excessively to excitation cannot be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the rotation of the rotor 32a is rapidly performed by the two-phase excitation stop control by performing the stop control of the reel motor by using both the two-phase excitation stop control and the three-phase excitation stop control as in the present embodiment. The brake is guided to the target stop angle position while being braked, and then the three-phase excitation stop control obtains a brake by exciting two brake phases at opposite positions across the stop phase of the target stop angle position. Since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position by excitation, the rotating rotor 32a can be stopped at the target stop angle position without vibrating. Furthermore, since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a is specified, so that the reel can be smoothly rotated at the start of rotation.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  In this embodiment, as a reel stop control method, stop control by a stop control table of a stop control table created from table creation data registered in advance in the ROM 41b (hereinafter also referred to as a table method), timing of a stop operation Each searchable position is searched, and the following three methods are adopted: stop control based on the search result (hereinafter also referred to as the control method) and stop control based on both the table method and the control method (hereinafter also referred to as the table + control method). As a result of the internal lottery, stop control is performed by one of the methods according to the reel stop status.

  Which of these three methods is used for stop control is determined in advance. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, when the result of the internal lottery is a loss, after the game starts, a stop operation that is first performed with all reels still rotating (hereinafter also referred to as a first stop). Any one reel has already stopped and two reels are rotating, that is, the second stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as second stop), any two reels are stopped and one reel In the state of rotating, that is, in any stop operation of the third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as third stop), stop control is performed by the table method.

  The results of the internal lottery are Replay (1), Replay (2), Bell, Big Bonus (1) + Replay (1), Big Bonus (1) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (2) + Replay (1), In the case of big bonus (2) + replay (2), big bonus (3) + replay (1), big bonus (3) + replay (2), big bonus (4), big bonus (5) In the first stop, stop control is performed by the table method, and in the second stop and the third stop, stop control is performed by the control method.

  Internal lottery results are red cherry, blue cherry, white cherry, bell + red cherry, bell + blue cherry, bell + white cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + red cherry, big bonus (1) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Bell, Big Bonus (2), Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Bell, Big Bonus (3), Big Bonus (3) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + In the case of a bell, the table + control method is used for any stop operation of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop. Please is carried out.

  Table creation data for creating a stop control table used when performing stop control by the table method and the table + control method is registered in advance in the ROM 41b, and is selected with reference to the table index stored in the ROM 41b. Is done.

  In the table index, the start address of the area where the data for table creation is stored from the reference address (table_index) when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) The difference up to the address where the index data indicating is stored is registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the winning combination is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address (table_index).

  In the present embodiment, stop control tables created from individual table creation data are not used for all internal lottery results. Specifically, for lost, bell, big bonus (4), and big bonus (5), individual table creation data is prepared in advance, but for other combinations and combinations of combinations, Five types of common table creation data that are commonly used for combination of combinations are prepared in advance, and the table index includes individual tables for each of lose, bell, big bonus (4), and big bonus (5). Index data indicating the top address of the area where the creation data is stored is stored, and index data indicating the top address of the area where the five types of common table creation data (1) to (5) are stored. Each is stored.

  Common table creation data is red cherry, bell + red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + red cherry, big bonus (1) + blue cherry, big bonus (1) + white cherry, big bonus (1) + Common table creation data used in common for Bell (1), Blue Cherry, Bell + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2), Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Blue Cherry , Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Common Table Creation Data (2) Commonly Used for Bell, White Cherry, Bell + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3), Big Bonus (3) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry, Big Bona (3) + common table creation data (3), replay (1), big bonus (1) + replay (1), big bonus (2) + replay (1), big bonus (3) ) + Replay (1) common table creation data (4), replay (2), big bonus (1) + replay (2), big bonus (2) + replay (2), big bonus ( 3) Consists of common table creation data (5) used in common for + replay (2).

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the stop status of the reel is the first stop, the second stop, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, There may be differences depending on whether the left and middle reels are stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, or one of the reels is stopped. In this case, the address of the stop control table to be referred to is registered for each rotating reel for each situation, and the start address of the table creation data is the same. On the basis of this, it is possible to specify the address of the stop control table to be referred to according to each situation. And to be able to identify the stop control tables required in accordance with the situation. Even when the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, as described above, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 16 steps (the number of steps that one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are areas 0 to 20 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3). Sliding frame when an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number). It is a table with each number set.

  In the table creation data corresponding to the loss, the stop position where any combination of the combinations is not aligned on the winning line is stopped within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, and at the chance (from the table creation data applied at the time of the loss Stored is a stop control table determined so that stop positions constituting a combination of stop positions that do not stop in the specified stop control table do not stop.

  The table creation data corresponding to the bell stores a stop control table determined so that the stop position where the combination of the bells is aligned with any of the pay lines L1 to L4 is drawn and stopped within a drawing range of a maximum of four frames. ing.

  In the table creation data corresponding to the big bonus (4), the stop position where the combination of the big bonus (4) is aligned with any of the pay lines L5 and L6 is drawn and stopped within a drawing range of a maximum of four frames. Stored stop control table is stored.

  In the table creation data corresponding to the big bonus (5), it is determined that the stop position where the combination of the big bonus (5) is aligned with any of the pay lines L5 and L6 is drawn and stopped within the drawing range of a maximum of four frames. Stored stop control table is stored.

  In the common table creation data (1), the stop position where the combination of red cherries and the combination of big bonus (1) are aligned with any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 is drawn in the drawing range of up to four frames and stopped. Stored is a stop control table in which stop positions constituting the chance eyes are determined to be stoppable.

  In particular, among the stop control tables specified from the common table creation data (1), in the stop control table applied to the left reel while all the reels are rotating, as shown in FIG. For the region numbers 1 to 7 in which “red cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames, the number of sliding symbols for drawing “red cherry” into the winning lines L1 to L4 is determined. In addition, the number of sliding frames for drawing “Red 7” into the winning lines L1 to L4 is determined for the area numbers 12 to 18 where “Red 7” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. ing. In this embodiment, in the left reel, “red cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to four frames, and “red 7” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to four frames. Since the range that can be drawn into L4 does not overlap, there is no range in which both symbols can be drawn in common. In addition, with respect to the range in which neither “Red 7” nor “Red Cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, chances are assigned in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. The number of sliding symbols for drawing in the stop position constituting the chance eye is determined with respect to the area number in which the stop position can be drawn.

  In the common table creation data (2), the stop position where the combination of blue cherry and the combination of big bonus (2) is aligned with any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 is drawn in the drawing range of up to 4 frames and stopped. Stored is a stop control table in which stop positions constituting the chance eyes are determined to be stoppable.

  In particular, in the stop control table specified from the common table creation data (2), all the reels are rotating and the stop control table applied to the left reel has a maximum of 4 frames. In the range, the number of sliding frames for drawing “blue cherry” into the winning lines L1 to L4 is determined for the area numbers 0 and 15 to 20 in which “blue cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4. In addition, the number of sliding frames for drawing “Blue 7” into the winning lines L1 to L4 is determined for the area numbers 5 to 11 where “Blue 7” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. ing. In this embodiment, in the left reel, “blue cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, and “blue 7” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. Since the range that can be drawn into L4 does not overlap, there is no range in which both symbols can be drawn in common. In addition, with regard to the range in which neither “Blue 7” nor “Blue Cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, chances are assigned in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. The number of sliding symbols for drawing in the stop position constituting the chance eye is determined with respect to the area number in which the stop position can be drawn.

  In the common table creation data (3), the stop position where the combination of the white cherry and the combination of the big bonus (3) are aligned with any one of the pay lines L1 to L4 is drawn in the drawing range of a maximum of four frames and stopped. Stored is a stop control table in which stop positions constituting the chance eyes are determined to be stoppable.

  In particular, in the stop control table specified from the common table creation data (3), the stop control table applied to the left reel in a state where all the reels are rotating, the maximum of four frames are drawn. In the range, the number of sliding frames for drawing “white cherry” into the winning lines L1 to L4 is determined for the area numbers 8 to 14 in which “white cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4. Also, a sliding piece that draws “White 7” into the winning lines L1 to L4 for the area numbers 0 to 4, 19, and 20 in which “White 7” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. A number is defined. In this embodiment, in the left reel, “white cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, and “white 7” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. Since the range that can be drawn into L4 does not overlap, there is no range in which both symbols can be drawn in common. In addition, with respect to the range in which neither “White 7” nor “White Cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, chances are assigned in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. The number of sliding symbols for drawing in the stop position constituting the chance eye is determined with respect to the area number in which the stop position can be drawn.

  In the common table creation data (4), a stop control table is set so that the stop position where the combination of the replay (1) is aligned with any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 is drawn and stopped within a drawing range of a maximum of four frames. Is stored.

  In the common table creation data (5), a stop control table is set so that the stop position where the combination of the replay (2) is aligned with any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 is drawn and stopped within a drawing range of a maximum of four frames. Is stored.

  Since the stop control table is used only for the first stop when the bell is elected, only the stop control table for the first stop is stored in the table creation data corresponding to the bell. The address of the stop control table to be referred to and the stop control table used after the second stop are not stored. Similarly, when replay (1), big bonus (1) + replay (1), big bonus (2) + replay (1), big bonus (3) + replay (1) are won, replay (2), big bonus (1) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (2) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (3) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (4), Big Bonus (5) Even when the stop control table is used only for the first stop, common table creation data (4) corresponding to them, common table creation data (5), table creation data corresponding to big bonus (4) In the table creation data corresponding to the big bonus (5), only the stop control table for the first stop is stored, and the stop control to be referred to after the second stop is stored. Stop control table used for address or the second and subsequent stop of the table is not stored.

  Here, the content of the stop control according to the stop control method will be described.

  First, when the CPU 41a performs stop control by the table method, as shown in FIG. 16, when the reel starts rotating, or when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains, Refer to the table index before the reel stop operation becomes valid, and if there is a reel that has been stopped as a result of the internal lottery for an unstopped reel, the table creation data corresponding to the stop position of that reel Select the stop control table.

  Then, the selected stop control table is expanded and stored in the virtual sliding top table (see FIG. 20) assigned to the RAM 41c for each reel.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the virtual sliding top table, for each reel, the area corresponding to each area number corresponds to the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol area in the perspective window 3). ) (The number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each area number), and the number of sliding frames when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected is stored. The number of sliding symbols developed from the stop control table is stored corresponding to the corresponding area number of the corresponding reel.

  Next, when the CPU 41a performs stop control by the control method, as shown in FIG. 17, the reel stop operation becomes effective when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. As a result of the internal lottery for reels that have not been stopped in the previous stage, based on the stop position of the reels that have already been stopped, the abnormal winning (for the role not won in the internal lottery) is determined for each stop position and the stop prohibited position (stopped) In the case of an abnormal winning (a winning position other than the winning role) or a duplicated winning position is determined for an unstopped reel, and if it is an abnormal winning or a stop prohibited position, a stop prohibited position flag is set. To do.

  Next, for each stop operation position, a stop position corresponding to the result of the internal lottery (a stop position where the winning combination is aligned on the winning line) is searched.

  Specifically, for each stop operation position, the stop position according to the number of sliding symbols of 0 to 4 is set in the order corresponding to the combination (bell, big bonus (4), big bonus (5). In the order of 4, 0, 3, 1, 2, replay (1), replay (2), the number of sliding frames is specified in the order of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4) Is determined to be a stop position where the winning combination is aligned on the winning line, and if it is determined that the winning combination is the stopping position aligned on the winning line, a stop prohibition position flag is further set for the stop position. It is determined whether or not a stop prohibition position flag is set. If the stop prohibition position flag is not set, the stop position is acquired, and the number of sliding frames at the acquired stop position corresponds to the corresponding reel in the virtual sliding frame table. Stored in the area number of the stop operation position.

  Even if it is determined that the winning combination is a stop position on the winning line, if the stop prohibition position flag is set for the stop position, the next stop position is determined. In addition, even if the stop positions of all the sliding symbols are determined, there is no stop position where the winning combination is aligned on the winning line, or even if there is a stopping position where the winning combination is aligned on the winning line, the stop prohibited position flag is set. If it is set, the number of sliding symbols at the last determined stop position is stored in the corresponding reel of the virtual sliding symbol table and the area number of the corresponding stop operation position. That is, in the case of bell, big bonus (4), and big bonus (5), the number of sliding frames is 4, and in the case of replay (1) and replay (2), 0 is stored. In addition, when the stop prohibition position flag is set for the stop position determined last, the number of slip frames that is acquired retroactively to the stop position for which the stop prohibition position flag is not set and becomes the acquired stop position Is stored in the area number of the corresponding stop operation position of the corresponding reel in the virtual sliding top table. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the symbols “bell” and “replay” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on all reels, and the reels are pulled in and stopped within the range of 0 to 5 frames. The combination of Bell, Big Bonus (4), Big Bonus (5), Replay (1) or Replay (2) can be aligned on the winning line, so the winning combination will always stop on the winning line The number of sliding frames as the position is stored.

  After the number of sliding symbols is stored for all the area numbers of the rotating reels in the virtual sliding frame table, the stop operation is validated, and in this state, among the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the rotating reels When any of the corresponding operations is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is identified based on the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, and the reel of which the stop operation is detected With reference to the virtual sliding top table, the number of sliding tops corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired. Based on the acquired number of sliding symbols, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, when the CPU 41a performs stop control by the table + control method, as shown in FIG. 18, when the rotation of the reel is started or the reel is stopped, the reel that is still rotating still remains. Sometimes, the table index is referred to in the stage before the reel stop operation becomes valid, and the stop corresponding to the stop position of the stopped reel is determined from the table creation data corresponding to the result of the internal lottery for the unstopped reel. Select a control table.

  Then, the selected stop control table is expanded to acquire the number of sliding frames for each stop operation position, and the acquired number of sliding frames is stored in the corresponding area number of the corresponding reel in the virtual sliding frame table.

  Next, as a result of the internal lottery for the unstopped reels, an abnormal winning (a role not won in the internal lottery) is determined for each stop position based on the stop position of the stopped reel, and a stop prohibited position (when stopped) Then, an abnormal winning (a winning position other than the winning combination) or a duplicated winning position is determined for an unstopped reel, and if it is an abnormal winning or a stop prohibited position, a stop prohibited position flag is set.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, it is possible to align a plurality of winning combinations on the winning line in the stop control table specified from the common table creation data.

  For this reason, if some of the winning combinations for the final stopped reel are on the winning line as a result of other stopped reels, the winning combination will be unmatched for that winning line. A stop prohibition position flag is set for the position. In addition, even in the first stop or the second stop, a stop position at which an abnormal winning or a double winning cannot be avoided in an unstopped reel (for example, although one hand can be avoided, the other hand is aligned) The stop prohibition position flag is set for.

  Next, for each stop operation position, the stop position is searched for each stop operation position based on the stop position of the reel that has been stopped as a result of the internal lottery.

  Specifically, for each stop operation position, stop positions according to the number of sliding frames of 0 to 4 are set in an order determined according to the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table (in this embodiment, FIG. For example, if the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table is 0, the number of sliding frames is 0, the number of sliding frames is 3, the number of sliding frames is 1, and the number of sliding frames is 2. The priority of the specified stop position is compared with the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding frames developed from the stop control table stored in the virtual sliding frame table. To do.

  Then, as a result of the comparison, it is determined whether or not the priority of the stop position specified for each number of sliding frames is higher than the priority of the stopping position based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table. As shown in FIG. 19B, the priority of the stop position is higher in the stop position where the stop prohibition position flag is not set than in the stop position where the stop prohibition position flag is set. The stop position where the winning combination is aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L4 has a higher priority than the stop position where the combination is not aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L4, and the winning combination is a special role + small role In this case, it is determined that the stop position where the special combination is aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L4 is higher in priority than the stop position where the small combination is aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L4. Further, in the first stop and the second stop, if the winning combination is a special combination + small combination, if there is a stop position where both of the selected special combination and small combination are on any of the winning lines L1 to L4 Unless the stop prohibition position flag is set, the stop position is determined as having higher priority than the stop position where the special combination or small combination is aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L4. In addition, when the winning combination is a plurality of small combinations with different payouts, a small combination with relatively higher payout than a stop position where a relatively small payout is aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L4. The stop position aligned with any of the lines L1 to L4 is determined as having a higher priority. Further, if the winning combination is a stop position where the winning combination is aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L6, the winning combination is one of the winning lines L1 to L4 rather than the stop position where the winning combination is aligned with any of the winning lines L5, L6. It is determined that the aligned stop positions have higher priority. When determining the priority of the stop position, as shown in FIG. 19B, a priority table in which the priorities of the types of stop positions are set is provided, and either stop is referred to by referring to the priority table. Whether or not the position priority is high may be determined, or according to a predetermined priority (priority shown in FIG. 19B), a stop position with a high priority is a stop with a low priority. A program in which it is determined that the priority is higher than the position (for example, whether or not both stop positions are stop positions where the winning combinations are aligned, one is a stop position where the winning combinations are not aligned, and the other is If it is a stop position where the winning combination is aligned, the stop position where the winning combination is aligned is determined to have a higher priority, so that it is determined which stop position has a higher priority. Anyway.

  If it is determined that the priority of the stop position specified for each number of sliding frames is higher than the priority of the stopping position based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table, The number of sliding frames stored in the area number of the corresponding stop operation position of the corresponding reel is updated to the number of sliding frames that become the stop position searched by the number of sliding frames.

  In addition, even when compared with the stop positions of all the sliding frame numbers, the priority of the stopping positions searched for by the number of sliding frames is more than the priority of the stopping position based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table. If it is not determined that the number is high, the number of sliding symbols stored in the virtual sliding frame table is not updated, and the number of sliding symbols developed from the stop control table is maintained.

  For example, a case where only the big bonus (1) is won and all reels are still rotating will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 21, the stop operation positions of the area numbers 0 and 8 to 20 of the left reel No stop prohibition flag is set for the stop position based on the number of sliding symbols developed from the stop control table, and the stop positions higher than the priority of these stop positions are specified according to the number of sliding symbols. Since there is no position, the number of sliding symbols developed from the stop control table and stored in the virtual sliding symbol table is maintained. For the stop operation positions of the region numbers 1 to 7, a stop prohibition position flag is set for the stop position (region numbers 5 and 7) based on the number of sliding symbols developed from the stop control table. That is, there is a stop position that is higher than the priority of the stop position specified from these stop operation positions, so that the sliding top that is determined to have the highest priority at the earliest stage in the order shown in FIG. The number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table is updated to a number (the number of sliding frames is 3 for the stop operation positions of the region numbers 5 and 7 and the number of sliding frames is 0 for the stop operation positions of the region numbers 1 to 4 and 6).

  Then, after the comparison of the priority of the number of sliding frames is completed for all the area numbers of the rotating reels in the virtual sliding frame table, the stop operation is validated, and in this state, of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R When any operation corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the stop operation position area number is identified based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected, and the stop operation is performed. The number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the virtual sliding symbol table of the reel where the is detected. Based on the acquired number of sliding symbols, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In this embodiment, stop control is performed by a stop control method, a table method and a table + control method corresponding to one internal lottery result in one game state and the stop state of a reel (and the stop position of a stopped reel). The stop control table to be referred to when performing, the search order of the stop position when performing stop control with the control method, and the order of determining the priority of the stop position when performing stop control with the table + control method are uniquely determined. The number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table is also unique with respect to one internal lottery result in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). For this reason, when all of the gaming state, the internal lottery result, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel stop control is performed based on the same control pattern. It becomes.

  In this embodiment, no matter which stop control is applied, the number of sliding frames is always in the range of 0 to 4, so that the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of 4 frames after detecting the stop operation. Is possible. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  Therefore, if any winning combination is won, regardless of the stop control method, the maximum number of winning combinations will be drawn within the range of 4 frames, and the number of sliding frames that will be pulled in so that there is no winning combination. Is stored in the virtual sliding piece table, and the reel stop control is performed. The stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed to align them and stop. The symbol of the winning combination will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  If none of the winning combinations have been won, that is, in the case of a loss, at the time of the first to third stops, the winning combination line will not match any winning combination using the table creation data corresponding to the loss. The number of sliding frames without stopping the eyes is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, stop control is performed so that none of the winning combinations are aligned with the winning line and the chances are not stopped.

  If any of Replay (1), Big Bonus (1) + Replay (1), Big Bonus (2) + Replay (1), Big Bonus (3) + Replay (1) is won, At the time of one stop, the number of sliding frames that draws the symbols constituting the combination of replay (1) to any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames using the common data creation table (4) It is stored in the virtual sliding top table, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, at the time of the second and third stops, the stop position where the replay (1) is aligned and stopped at the maximum 4 frames drawing range from the stop position of the stopped reels to the pay lines L1 to L4 is set for each stop operation position. The number of sliding symbols that are searched and become the stop positions for stopping the replay (1) together is stored in the virtual sliding frame table for each stop operation position. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the replay (1) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the same. It will be.

  If any of Replay (2), Big Bonus (1) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (2) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (3) + Replay (2) is won At the time of one stop, the number of sliding frames that draws the symbols constituting the combination of replay (2) to any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames using the common data creation table (5) It is stored in the virtual sliding top table. Further, at the time of the second and third stops, the stop position where the replay (2) is aligned and stopped from the stop position of the stopped reels to the pay lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range is set for each stop operation position. The number of sliding symbols, which are searched and become stop positions for stopping the replay (2) together, is stored in the virtual sliding symbol table for each stop operation position. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the replay (2) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within a maximum of four frames, the control is performed to stop the same. It will be.

  When the red cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the common data creation table (1) is used to configure the combination of the red cherry and the big bonus (1). The number of sliding symbols that draws the symbol to any of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the range of 4 frames and the number of sliding symbols that draws the chance are stored in the virtual sliding frame table, and then a prize other than red cherry ( With regard to the stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that become stop-prohibited positions that cannot avoid the big bonus (1)) or double winning is stored, the number of sliding tops that become stop positions other than the stop-prohibited positions is updated. Specifically, at the time of the first stop and the second stop, depending on the stop operation position of the third stop reel, the stop that stores the number of sliding symbols that becomes a stop position that makes it impossible to avoid winnings other than red cherry or double winnings is stored. The number of sliding symbols at the operation position is updated to the number of sliding symbols at the stop position where it is possible to avoid winnings other than red cherries and double winnings, and the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. In addition, at the time of the third stop, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols as the stopping position where it is impossible to avoid winnings other than red cherries or overlapping winnings is stored is the winning or overlapping other than red cherry The number of sliding symbols at the stop position where the winning can be avoided is updated, and the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of red cherries can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range, the control is performed to stop the same and win. For the combination of the big bonus (1) that has not been performed, control is performed so that the combination is stopped within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When the blue cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the common data creation table (2) is used to constitute the combination of the blue cherry and the big bonus (2). The number of sliding symbols that draws the symbol to any of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the range of 4 frames and the number of sliding symbols that draws the chance are stored in the virtual sliding frame table, and then a prize other than Blue Cherry ( With regard to the stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that become stop-prohibited positions that cannot avoid the big bonus (2)) or double winning is stored, the number of sliding tops that become stop positions other than the stop-prohibited positions is updated. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of blue cherries can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within a maximum of four frames in the drawing range, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. The combination of the big bonus (2) that has not been performed is controlled to be stopped in a pull-in range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When the white cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the common data creation table (3) is used to configure the combination of the symbols constituting the white cherry and the big bonus (3). The number of sliding symbols that draws the symbol to any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding symbols that draws the chance are stored in the virtual sliding frame table, and then the winning of a role other than white cherry ( With regard to the stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that become stop-prohibited positions that cannot avoid the big bonus (3)) or double winning is stored, the number of sliding tops that become stop positions other than the stop-prohibited positions is updated. Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of white cherries can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the same and the winning line is selected. The combination of the big bonus (3) that has not been performed is controlled to be stopped in a pulling range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When the bell is won, at the time of the first stop, any of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames for the symbols constituting the bell combination using the data creation table corresponding to the bell The number of sliding frames to be drawn to the maximum is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. In addition, at the time of the second and third stops, a stop position for stopping by aligning the bells within the maximum four-frame drawing range from the stop position of the stopped reel to the pay lines L1 to L4 is searched for each stop operation position, The number of sliding symbols as stop positions at which the bells are aligned and stopped is stored in the virtual sliding symbol table for each stop operation position. Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the bells can be stopped on the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so as to stop them together. .

  When Bell + Red Cherry is elected, during the first to third stops, the combination of the red cherry and the big bonus (1) using the common data creation table (1) and The symbols that make up the red cherry after the number of sliding symbols that draws the maximum number of symbols in the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. Out of the stop operation positions for drawing in the winning lines L1 to L4, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position where the bell having a larger payout number than the red cherries can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, and the symbols constituting the red cherries are the winning lines L1. The number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position that is not pulled into L4 is updated to the number of sliding symbols that pulls the bell into the winning lines L1 to L4. The stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols that become the stop-prohibited position that cannot avoid the double winning (Big Bonus (1)) or the double winning is stored is updated to the number of sliding symbols that become the stop positions other than the stop-prohibited position. The In addition, the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the bells can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so as to stop the wins. If you cannot pull the combination of bells into the L1-L4 with a maximum draw range of 4 frames, if you can stop the combination of red cherries in the draw line L1-L4 with a draw range of up to 4 frames, Control to stop them in alignment is performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control of aligning the bells with a larger number of payouts than the red cherries in the pay lines L1 to L4, and the red cherries can be won only when the bells cannot be drawn. In this embodiment, as will be described later, since the symbols constituting the bell are arranged so as to be within the pull-in range for all reels, the combination of bells is always set when Bell + Red Cherry is won. The winning lines L1 to L4 are aligned.

  When Bell + Blue Cherry is elected, during the first to third stops, the combination of symbols and big bonus (2) constituting the combination of blue cherry using the common data creation table (2) and The symbols that make up the blue cherry after the number of sliding symbols that draws the maximum number of winning symbols L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. Out of the stop operation positions for drawing in the winning lines L1 to L4, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position where the bell with a larger number of payouts than the blue cherries can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, and the symbols constituting the blue cherries are the winning lines L1 The number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position that is not pulled into L4 is updated to the number of sliding symbols that pulls the bell into the winning lines L1 to L4. The stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols that become the stop prohibition position that cannot avoid the double winning (big bonus (2)) or the double winning is stored is updated to the number of sliding symbols that become the stop position other than the stop prohibition position. The In addition, the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the bells can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so as to stop the wins. If you cannot pull the combination of bells into the L1-L4 with a maximum draw range of 4 frames, if you can stop the combination of blue cherries in the draw line L1-L4 with a draw range of up to 4 frames, Control to stop them in alignment is performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the bells with a larger number of payouts than the blue cherries in the pay lines L1 to L4, and the blue cherries can be won only when the bells cannot be drawn. In this embodiment, as will be described later, since the symbols constituting the bell are arranged so as to be within the pull-in range for all reels, a combination of bells is always used when a bell + blue cherry is won. The winning lines L1 to L4 are aligned.

  When Bell + White Cherry is elected, during the first to third stops, the combination of symbols and big bonus (3) constituting the combination of white cherry using the common data creation table (3) and The symbols constituting the white cherry are stored in the virtual sliding piece table after the number of sliding symbols that draws the maximum number of the symbols constituting the number of sliding symbols to draw the chance into the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames is stored. Out of the stop operation positions for drawing in the winning lines L1 to L4, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position where the bell with a larger number of payouts than the white cherries can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, and the symbols constituting the white cherries are the winning lines L1. The number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position that is not pulled into L4 is updated to the number of sliding symbols that pulls the bell into the winning lines L1 to L4. The stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols that become the stop-prohibited position that cannot avoid the double winning (Big Bonus (3)) or the double winning is stored is updated to the number of sliding symbols that become the stop positions other than the stop-prohibited position. The In addition, the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the bells can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so as to stop the wins. If the combination of bells cannot be pulled into L1-L4 with a maximum draw range of 4 frames, and if the combination of white cherries can be stopped on the winning lines L1-L4 with a draw range of maximum 4 frames, Control to stop them in alignment is performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the bells with a larger number of payouts than the white cherries in the pay lines L1 to L4, and the white cherries can be won only when the bells cannot be drawn. In this embodiment, as will be described later, since the symbols constituting the bell are arranged so as to be within the pull-in range for all reels, a combination of bells is always used when a bell + white cherry is won. The winning lines L1 to L4 are aligned.

  When the big bonus (1) is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the combination of the red cherry and the big bonus (1) using the common data creation table (1) Big bonus (1) after the number of sliding symbols that draws the symbols that make up the winning symbol into any of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding symbols that draws the chance are stored in the virtual sliding frame table For the stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols as a stop prohibition position in which a winning of a role other than (red cherry) or double winning cannot be avoided is stored, the number of sliding symbols as a stop position other than the stop prohibition position is updated. Specifically, at the time of the first stop and the second stop, depending on the stop operation position of the third stop reel, the number of sliding symbols as a stop position where it is impossible to avoid winnings other than the big bonus (1) or overlapping winnings is stored. The number of sliding symbols at the stopped operation position is updated to the number of sliding symbols at the stopping position that can avoid winnings other than the big bonus (1) and double winnings, and the number of sliding symbols at other stopping operation positions is maintained. Is done. Further, at the time of the third stop, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols as the stopping position where it is impossible to avoid winnings or duplicate winnings other than the big bonus (1) is stored as the big bonus (1 ), The number of sliding symbols at the stop position where the winning position can be avoided and the number of sliding symbols at the other stop operation positions are maintained. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (1) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range, the control is performed to stop the same. However, the combination of red cherries that have not been won will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  When the big bonus (1) + red cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (1) constituting the combination of red cherries using the common data creation table (1) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table (1) For the stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that become stop-prohibited positions that cannot avoid winnings (abnormal winnings) or double winnings other than red cherry is stored, the sliding tops that become stop positions other than the stop-prohibited positions Updated to number. Specifically, at the time of the first stop and the second stop, depending on the stop operation position of the third stop reel, a sliding piece that becomes a stop position that makes it impossible to avoid winnings or duplicate winnings other than Big Bonus (1) and Red Cherry The number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position in which the number is stored is updated to the number of sliding symbols as a stop position that can avoid winnings and duplicate winnings other than Big Bonus (1) and Red Cherry, and other stopping operation positions The number of sliding frames is maintained. In addition, at the time of the third stop, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols as the stopping position where it is impossible to avoid winnings or duplicate winnings other than the big bonus (1) and red cherry is stored is the big It is updated to the number of sliding symbols at the stop position where it is possible to avoid winnings other than the bonus (1) and red cherry and double winnings, and the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (1) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range, the control is performed to stop the same. If the combination of red cherries can be stopped on the pay lines L1 to L4 within a maximum of 4 frames, control is performed to align and stop them.

  When the big bonus (1) + blue cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (1) constituting the combination of red cherries using the common data creation table (1) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table Among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting (1) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position where the blue cherry does not become the stop position aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4 is the blue cherry winning It is updated to the number of sliding frames that will be the stop positions aligned with the lines L1 to L4, and a prize other than the big bonus (1) and blue cherry (red cherry) or double prize The stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that are unavoidable stop prohibited positions is stored is updated to the number of sliding tops that are stop positions other than the stop prohibited position, and the number of sliding tops at other stop operation positions is maintained. . Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (1) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range, the control is performed to stop the same. If the combination of Big Bonus (1) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the blue cherry combination is aligned to the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. If they can be stopped, the control is performed to align them and stop, and the combination of red cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (1) with the winning lines L1 to L4 over the blue cherry, and the blue cherry can be won only when the big bonus (1) cannot be drawn. It becomes possible.

  When the big bonus (1) + white cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (1) constituting the combination of red cherries using the common data creation table (1) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table Among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting (1) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position where the white cherry is not aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4 is the white cherry winning Updated to the number of sliding frames that will be the stop positions aligned with the lines L1 to L4, winnings other than the big bonus (1) and white cherry (red cherry) and double winnings The stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that are unavoidable stop prohibited positions is stored is updated to the number of sliding tops that are stop positions other than the stop prohibited position, and the number of sliding tops at other stop operation positions is maintained. . Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (1) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range, the control is performed to stop the same. If the combination of Big Bonus (1) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the combination of white cherries is aligned to the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. If they can be stopped, the control is performed to align them and stop, and the combination of red cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (1) with the winning lines L1 to L4 over the white cherry, and the white cherry can be won only when the big bonus (1) cannot be drawn. It becomes possible.

  When Big Bonus (1) + Bell is elected, during the first to third stops, the symbols and big bonus (1) constituting the combination of red cherries using the common data creation table (1) The first stop after the number of sliding symbols that draw the maximum number of winning symbols L1 to L4 and the number of sliding symbols that pull chances in the drawing range of 4 frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table At the time of the second stop, among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting the big bonus (1) cannot be drawn into the pay lines L1 to L4, the stop operation positions where the bell is not the stop position aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4. The number of sliding symbols is updated to the number of sliding symbols at which the bell is aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4, and the symbols constituting the big bonus (1) are changed to the winning lines L1 to L4. Out of the stop operation positions where the bell does not become the stop position where the bell is aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4, the stop position where both the symbols constituting the big bonus (1) and the bell are aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4 is a range of up to 4 frames. If it is the stop operation position that can be withdrawn, the symbols and bells that make up the big bonus (1) are both updated to the number of sliding symbols that are the stop positions aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4. Further, at the time of the third stop, when a bell is aligned on any of the winning lines L1 to L4 of the first stop and the second stop reel, a stop operation position for drawing a symbol other than the bell on the winning line. The number of sliding frames is updated to the number of sliding frames that draws the bell on the winning line. In addition, the stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols that become the stop prohibition position in which a winning other than the big bonus (1) and the bell (red cherry) or the double winning can not be avoided is stored is a stop position other than the stop prohibition position. Updated to the number of sliding frames. In addition, the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (1) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range, the control is performed to stop the same. If the combination of Big Bonus (1) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the combination of bells is stopped with a drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning lines L1 to L4. If they can be controlled, control is performed to align them and stop, and a combination of red cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a pull-in range of a maximum of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (1) with the winning lines L1 to L4 over the bell, and it is possible to win the bell only when the big bonus (1) cannot be drawn. Become. In addition, in the first stop and the second stop, it is a stop position where only the combination of the big bonus (1) with the number of sliding frames before the update is aligned, and both the combination of the big bonus (1) and the combination of the bell are within the pull-in range. If there is a stop position that can be aligned (except for the prohibition position), the stop position is updated and the stop control is performed.

  When the big bonus (2) is won, during the first to third stops, the combination of the blue cherry and the big bonus (2) using the common data creation table (2) Big bonus (2) after the number of sliding symbols that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the symbol into any of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding symbols that draws chance chances are stored in the virtual sliding frame table The stop operation position that stores the number of sliding tops that are prohibited positions that cannot be avoided (blue cherry) and double winnings is updated to the number of sliding tops that become stop positions other than the stop prohibited position. The number of sliding frames at the stop operation position other than is maintained. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (1) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range, the control is performed to stop the same. However, the combination of red cherries that have not been won will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  When the big bonus (2) + red cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (2) constituting the combination of blue cherries using the common data creation table (2) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table Among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting (2) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, the red cherry wins the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation positions where the red cherries are not aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4. Updated to the number of sliding frames at the stop positions aligned with lines L1 to L4, winnings other than Big Bonus (2) and Red Cherry (Blue Cherry) and double winnings The stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that are unavoidable stop prohibited positions is stored is updated to the number of sliding tops that are stop positions other than the stop prohibited position, and the number of sliding tops at other stop operation positions is maintained. . Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (2) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop them evenly. If the combination of big bonus (2) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the combination of red cherries is aligned to the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. If it can be stopped, control is performed to align and stop, and the combination of blue cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (2) with the pay lines L1 to L4 over the red cherry, and the red cherry can be won only when the big bonus (2) cannot be drawn. It becomes possible.

  When the big bonus (2) + blue cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (2) constituting the combination of blue cherries using the common data creation table (2) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the symbols that make up the combination to the maximum of any of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table. (2) For the stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that become stop-prohibited positions in which a winning other than the blue cherry (abnormal winning) or double winnings cannot be avoided is stored, the sliding top that becomes a stop position other than the stop-prohibited position The number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Reel stop control is performed. Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (2) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop them evenly. If the combination of blue cherries can be stopped on the winning lines L1 to L4 within a maximum of 4 frames, control is performed to stop them together.

  When the big bonus (2) + white cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (2) constituting the combination of blue cherries using the common data creation table (2) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chances are stored Among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting (2) cannot be drawn into the pay lines L1 to L4, the white cherry wins the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation positions where the white cherries do not become the stop positions aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4. It is updated to the number of sliding frames that are the stop positions aligned with the lines L1 to L4, and a prize other than the big bonus (2) and white cherry (red cherry) or double prize The stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that are unavoidable stop prohibited positions is stored is updated to the number of sliding tops that are stop positions other than the stop prohibited position, and the number of sliding tops at other stop operation positions is maintained. . Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (2) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop them evenly. If the combination of Big Bonus (2) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the combination of white cherries is aligned to the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. If it can be stopped, control is performed to align and stop, and the combination of blue cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (2) with the pay lines L1 to L4 over the white cherry, and the white cherry can be won only when the big bonus (2) cannot be drawn. It becomes possible.

  When the big bonus (2) + Bell is won, the symbols and big bonus (2) constituting the combination of blue cherries using the common data creation table (2) during the first to third stops The first stop after the number of sliding symbols that draw the maximum number of winning symbols L1 to L4 and the number of sliding symbols that pull chances in the drawing range of 4 frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table At the time of the second stop, among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting the big bonus (2) cannot be drawn into the pay lines L1 to L4, the stop operation position where the bell is not the stop position aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4. The number of sliding symbols is updated to the number of sliding symbols at which the bell is aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4, and the symbols constituting the big bonus (2) are changed to the winning lines L1 to L4. Out of the stop operation positions where the bell does not become the stop position aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4, the stop position where both the symbols constituting the big bonus (2) and the bell align with the winning lines L1 to L4 are in a range of up to 4 frames. If it is the stop operation position that can be withdrawn, the symbols and bells that make up the big bonus (2) are both updated to the number of sliding symbols that are the stop positions aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4. Further, at the time of the third stop, when a bell is aligned on any of the winning lines L1 to L4 of the first stop and the second stop reel, a stop operation position for drawing a symbol other than the bell on the winning line. The number of sliding frames is updated to the number of sliding frames that draws the bell on the winning line. In addition, the stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols that is a stop prohibition position where a winning other than the big bonus (2) and the bell (blue cherry) or double winnings cannot be avoided is stored is a stop position other than the stop prohibition position. Updated to the number of sliding frames. In addition, the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (2) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop them evenly. If the combination of Big Bonus (2) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the combination of bells is stopped with the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning lines L1 to L4. If it is possible to perform the control, the control is performed so as to stop all the same, and the combination of blue cherries that are not selected is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of four frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (2) with the winning lines L1 to L4 over the bell, and it is possible to win the bell only when the big bonus (2) cannot be drawn. Become. In addition, in the first stop and the second stop, it is a stop position where only the combination of the big bonus (2) with the number of sliding frames before the update is aligned, and both the combination of the big bonus (2) and the combination of the bell are within the pull-in range. If there is a stop position that can be aligned (except for the prohibition position), the stop position is updated and the stop control is performed.

  When the big bonus (3) is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the combination of symbols and the big bonus (3) constituting the combination of white cherries using the common data creation table (3) Big bonus (3) after the number of sliding symbols that draws the symbols that make up the winning line into the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding symbols that draws the chance are stored in the virtual sliding frame table The stop operation position that stores the number of sliding tops that are prohibited positions that cannot be avoided, such as winning prizes (white cherries) and duplicate winnings, is updated to the number of sliding tops that are stopping positions other than the prohibited positions. The number of sliding frames at the stop operation position other than is maintained. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (3) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the same. However, the combination of white cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When the big bonus (3) + red cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (3 that constitute the combination of white cherries using the common data creation table (3) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table Among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting (3) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, the red cherry wins the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation positions where the red cherries are not aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4. Updated to the number of sliding frames at the stop positions aligned with the lines L1 to L4, winnings other than Big Bonus (3) and Red Cherry (White Cherry) The stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that are unavoidable stop prohibited positions is stored is updated to the number of sliding tops that are stop positions other than the stop prohibited position, and the number of sliding tops at other stop operation positions is maintained. . Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (3) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the same. If the big bonus (3) combination cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the red cherry combination is aligned to the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. If it can be stopped, control is performed to align and stop them, and the combination of white cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (3) with the pay lines L1 to L4 over the red cherry, and the red cherry can be won only when the big bonus (3) cannot be drawn. It becomes possible.

  When the big bonus (3) + blue cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (3 that constitute the combination of white cherry using the common data creation table (3) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table Among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting (3) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position where the blue cherry does not become the stop position aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4 is blue cherry. Updated to the number of sliding frames that will be the stop positions aligned with the lines L1 to L4, winnings other than the big bonus (3) and blue cherry (white cherry) and double winnings The stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that are unavoidable stop prohibited positions is stored is updated to the number of sliding tops that are stop positions other than the stop prohibited position, and the number of sliding tops at other stop operation positions is maintained. . Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (3) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the same. If the combination of Big Bonus (3) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the blue cherry combination is aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. If it can be stopped, control is performed to align and stop them, and the combination of white cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (3) with the winning lines L1 to L4 over the blue cherry, and the blue cherry can be won only when the big bonus (3) cannot be drawn. It becomes possible.

  When the big bonus (3) + white cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (3 that constitute the combination of white cherry using the common data creation table (3) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table (3) For the stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops serving as stop-prohibited positions in which a winning other than a white cherry (abnormal winning) or a double winning cannot be avoided is stored, the sliding tops serving as stop positions other than the stop-prohibiting positions are stored. The number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Reel stop control is performed. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (3) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the same. If a combination of white cherries can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within a maximum of four frames, control is performed to stop them together.

  When Big Bonus (3) + Bell is elected, symbols and Big Bonus (3) constituting the combination of white cherries using the common data creation table (3) during the first to third stops The first stop after the number of sliding symbols that draw the maximum number of winning symbols L1 to L4 and the number of sliding symbols that pull chances in the drawing range of 4 frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table At the time of the second stop, among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting the big bonus (3) cannot be drawn into the pay lines L1 to L4, the stop operation positions where the bell is not the stop position aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4. The number of sliding symbols is updated to the number of sliding symbols at which the bell is aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4, and the symbols constituting the big bonus (3) are changed to the winning lines L1 to L4. Out of the stop operation positions where the bell does not become the stop position aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4, the stop position where both the symbols constituting the big bonus (3) and the bell are aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4 is a range of up to 4 frames. If the stop operation position can be retracted, the symbol and the bell constituting the big bonus (3) are both updated to the number of sliding symbols as the stop positions aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4. Further, at the time of the third stop, when a bell is aligned on any of the winning lines L1 to L4 of the first stop and the second stop reel, a stop operation position for drawing a symbol other than the bell on the winning line. The number of sliding frames is updated to the number of sliding frames that draws the bell on the winning line. In addition, the stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols that become the stop prohibition position that cannot avoid the big bonus (3) and the winning combination other than the bell (white cherry) or the double winning is stored is a stop position other than the stop prohibition position. Updated to the number of sliding frames. In addition, the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (3) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the same. If the combination of Big Bonus (3) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a maximum draw range of 4 frames, the combination of bells is stopped with a draw range of up to 4 frames on the winning lines L1 to L4. If they can be controlled, control is performed to align them and stop, and the combination of white cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (3) with the winning lines L1 to L4 over the bell, and it is possible to win the bell only when the big bonus (3) cannot be drawn. Become. In addition, in the first stop and the second stop, it is a stop position where only the combination of the big bonus (3) with the number of sliding frames before the update is aligned, and both the combination of the big bonus (3) and the combination of the bell are within the pull-in range. If there is a stop position that can be aligned (except for the prohibition position), the stop position is updated and the stop control is performed.

  When the big bonus (4) is won, at the time of the first stop, four symbols constituting the combination of the big bonus (4) using the data creation table corresponding to the big bonus (4) The number of sliding symbols that are drawn to the winning line L5 or L6 to the maximum in the drawing range is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. Further, at the time of the second and third stops, the stop position where the big bonus (4) is aligned and stopped at the maximum 4 frames drawing range from the stop position of the stopped reel to the pay lines L5 and L6 is set for each stop operation position. Thus, the number of sliding symbols that are the stopping positions at which the big bonus (4) is aligned and stopped is stored in the virtual sliding symbol table for each stop operation position. Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (4) can be stopped in the pay lines L5 and L6 within a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the same. Will be.

  When the big bonus (5) is won, at the time of the first stop, four symbols constituting the combination of the big bonus (5) using the data creation table corresponding to the big bonus (5) are displayed. The number of sliding symbols that are drawn to the winning line L5 or L6 to the maximum in the drawing range is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. Further, at the time of the second and third stops, the stop position at which the big bonus (5) is aligned and stopped in the maximum 4 frames drawing range from the stop position of the stopped reel to the pay lines L5 and L6 is set for each stop operation position. Thus, the number of sliding symbols that are the stopping positions at which the big bonus (5) is stopped in alignment is stored in the virtual sliding symbol table for each stop operation position. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (5) can be stopped in the pay lines L5 and L6 within the maximum 4 frames drawing range, the control is performed to stop the same. Will be.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, for the combinations other than the big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5), the winning lines L1 to L4 set across the symbols positioned on the straight line of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are used. In contrast, the big bonus (4) and big bonus (5) are controlled so as to be aligned, but the stop positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages are different in all reels, and the symbols are not on a straight line. The winning lines L5 and L6 are aligned.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a big bonus (1) or a red cherry, a big bonus (2) or a blue cherry, a big bonus (3) + a white cherry, the respective constituent symbols. Is drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a maximum draw range of 4 frames, and for the stop operation position where the winning role cannot be drawn, the number of slide frames withdrawn in the range of maximum 4 frames is virtually slipped for each stop operation position Stop positions other than the stop-prohibited positions are stored in the stop operation positions where the number of sliding tops that are the stop-prohibited positions that cannot be avoided after winning positions other than the winning combination (abnormal winnings) or duplicate winnings are stored. The number of sliding symbols at the other stop operation positions is maintained, so that the number of sliding symbols is maintained according to the result of the internal lottery. If the stop operation at the stop operation position of the stop position other than the inhibition position is made, the display result is the same. In particular, in this embodiment, as the number of sliding symbols in the data for creating the common table, the number of sliding symbols that draws the chance is determined for the stop operation position where both of the big bonuses and the corresponding cherry combination cannot be drawn. Therefore, it is possible to derive a common chance by performing the control as described above.

  For red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries, only the cherries of the color corresponding to the upper or lower tier of the left reel will stop and wins. If “7” of any color or “Cherry” of the corresponding color does not stop on the winning line, the big bonus (1) to (3) The same number of sliding frames as when the corresponding big bonus is won is applied. In addition, even when “7” that does not correspond to the color of the winning cherry on the left reel winning line L1 to L4 stops when any of the cherries is won, the big bonus ( The same number of sliding symbols as in the case where the big bonus corresponding to the winning cherry among 1) to (3) is won is applied. For this reason, when one of the cherries is won and missed, the same stop position as when the big bonus corresponding to the won cherry is missed is stopped at a high rate.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the “bell” and “replay” are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames, for all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It can be stopped at any position within the range. That is, when the winning flags of bell, replay (1), replay (2), big bonus (4), and big bonus (5) are set, the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. Regardless, the winning combination can always be won.

  Also, only one red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry are placed on the left reel, so red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry are on the winning line. On the other hand, the combination of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry cannot be aligned unless the left reel is stopped at a timing that is within the pull-in range of four frames. Therefore, when a red cherry is won, the combination of red cherries can be placed on one of the winning lines only when the left reel is stopped at the timing of area numbers 1 to 7, When the left reel is stopped at a timing other than the above, that is, at the timings of area numbers 0 and 8 to 20, the combination of red cherries will not be aligned on any winning line and will be missed. In addition, when winning the blue cherry, it is possible to make a combination of blue cherries on any one of the winning lines only when the stop operation of the left reel is performed at the timing of the area numbers 0, 15-20, When the left reel is stopped at other timings, that is, at the timings of region numbers 1 to 14, the combination of blue cherries will not be aligned on any winning line and will be missed. In addition, when winning the white cherry, it is possible to make a combination of white cherries on any of the winning lines only when the stop operation of the left reel is performed at the timing of the area numbers 8 to 14, otherwise In other words, when the left reel is stopped at the timings of the area numbers 0 to 7 and 15 to 20, the combination of white cherries is not aligned on any winning line and is missed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the display mode (area numbers 5, 6, 7, 7, 8, 9) in which the “red cherry” symbol stops on any winning line of the left reel, and the “blue cherry” symbol is displayed. Display mode (area numbers 19/20/0, 0 / 1.2) that stops on any winning line on the left reel, and display that the “white cherry” symbol stops on any winning line on the left reel Aspects (region numbers 12, 13, 14, 14, 15, 16) are arranged in excess of 4 frames, which are the maximum pull-in ranges.

  For this reason, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 1 to 7) at which a maximum of 4 frames of “red cherry” symbols can be drawn and stopped on any winning line, “blue cherry” is displayed. You can draw a maximum of 4 frames of “design” and “white cherry” designs and stop them on any winning line, or you can draw a maximum of 4 frames of “blue cherry” symbols and stop them on any winning line When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position (area numbers 0, 15 to 20), the “red cherry” symbol and the “white cherry” symbol may be drawn up to a maximum of four frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 8 to 14) where a “white cherry” symbol can be drawn on a maximum of four frames and stopped on any winning line, It is stopped on any of the winning line Lee "pattern and the" blue cherry "symbol up to 4 frames pulled in also, so that can not be. In other words, the “blue cherry” symbol and the “white cherry” symbol do not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “red cherry” symbol can be drawn onto the winning line. The “Red Cherry” design and the “White Cherry” design do not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Cherry” design can be pulled into the winning line. The red cherry pattern and the blue cherry pattern do not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the stop operation is performed on the winning line. Since the “Blue Cherry” design and the “White Cherry” design are each arranged, the “Red Cherry” design, the “Blue Cherry” design, and the “White Cherry” design can be aimed at the same time. So that the stop operation position does not exist.

  In addition, there is an area where the “Red Cherry”, “Blue Cherry”, or “White Cherry” design is drawn on any of the winning lines in any of the areas on the left reel. , There is no area where it is possible to avoid drawing the “blue cherry” symbol or the “white cherry” symbol on the winning line. In other words, there is no stop operation position that does not stop the “red cherry” symbol, “blue cherry” symbol, or “white cherry” symbol on the winning line. ”And“ White Cherry ”symbols cannot be stopped on the winning line.

  In addition, for “Red 7”, “Blue 7”, and “White 7”, only one reel is arranged for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Therefore, the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) If the stop operation is not performed within the draw range of 4 frames on the winning line where the combination of big bonus (3) can be arranged, the combination of big bonus (1), big bonus (2), and big bonus (3) should be aligned. I can't. Therefore, when winning the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), if the left reel is stopped at a timing other than the 4-frame pull-in range, the big bonus (1), big bonus The combination of (2) and big bonus (3) will not be on any winning line and will be missed.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode (region numbers 16, 17, 18, 18, 19, 20) where the “red 7” symbol stops on any winning line of the left reel, and the “blue 7” symbol Display mode (area numbers 9, 10, 11, 11, 12, 13) that stops on any winning line on the left reel, and display that “white 7” symbol stops on any winning line on the left reel Aspects (area numbers 2, 3, 4, 4, 5, 6) are arranged in excess of 4 frames, which are the maximum pull-in ranges.

  For this reason, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 12 to 18) where the “red 7” symbol can be drawn on up to four frames and stopped on any winning line, “blue 7” is displayed. You can draw a maximum of 4 frames of the “seven” and “white 7” symbols and stop them on any winning line, or you can draw a maximum of 4 frames of the “blue 7” symbols and stop them on any winning line When a stop operation is performed at the stop operation position (region numbers 5 to 11), the “red 7” symbol and the “white 7” symbol can be drawn up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (area number 0 to 4, 19 to 20) where a maximum of 4 frames of “White 7” symbol can be drawn and stopped on any winning line, ”And“ Blue 7 ”symbols up to 4 frames Also be stopped on any of the winning line crowded come, so that can not be. That is, the “Blue 7” symbol and the “White 7” symbol do not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Red 7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line. The “Red 7” symbol and the “White 7” symbol do not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line. “Red 7” and “Blue 7” symbols and “Red 7” symbols and “Positions 7” and “Blue 7” symbols will not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the stop operation is performed. Since the “blue 7” symbol and the “white 7” symbol are arranged, there is no stop operation position that can aim at the “red 7” symbol, the “blue 7” symbol, and the “white 7” symbol at the same time.

  Further, in this embodiment, the display mode (area numbers 5, 6, 7, 7, 8, 9) in which the “red cherry” symbol stops on any winning line of the left reel and the “red 7” symbol on the left Display mode that stops on any winning line of the reel (area numbers 16, 17, 18, 18, 19, 20), Display mode that the “blue cherry” symbol stops on any winning line of the left reel ( Area number 19 · 20 · 0, 0 · 1 · 2) and “Blue 7” symbols stop on one of the winning lines on the left reel (region numbers 9 · 10 · 11, 11 · 12 · 13) , The display mode (region numbers 12, 13, 14, 14, 15, 16) where the “white cherry” symbol stops on any winning line of the left reel and the winning of which one of the “white 7” symbols is left reel Display mode that stops on the line (area number 2, 3, 4, 4, 6) That is, the “7” symbol of the same color as the display mode in which any color “cherry” symbol stops on any winning line on the left reel stops on any winning line on the left reel Each display mode is arranged to exceed 4 frames which is the maximum drawing range.

  For this reason, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 1 to 7) at which a maximum of four frames of “red cherry” symbols can be drawn and stopped on any winning line, “red 7 ”Stop operation position that allows drawing up to 4 frames at maximum and stopping it on any winning line, and drawing“ Red 7 ”on up to 4 frames and stopping on any winning line ( When the stop operation is performed in the area numbers 12 to 18), the “red cherry” symbol cannot be drawn and stopped on any winning line by a maximum of four frames. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (area number 0, 15 to 20) where a maximum of 4 frames can be drawn and stopped on any winning line, a maximum of 4 frames of “Blue 7” symbol is displayed. Withdrawal At a stop operation position (region numbers 5 to 11) that cannot be stopped on any of the winning lines, and can draw up to 4 frames of the “Blue 7” symbol and stop on any of the winning lines. When a stop operation is performed, the “Blue Cherry” symbol cannot be drawn on any winning line by up to four frames, and the “White Cherry” symbol cannot be When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 8 to 14) that can be stopped on any of the winning lines, a maximum of 4 frames of “White 7” symbol is drawn and placed on any of the winning lines Stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (area number 0 to 4, 19 to 20) that cannot be stopped, and can draw up to 4 frames of “White 7” symbol and stop it on any winning line. I If, so that it can not be stopped on any pay line draws up to four frames "white cherry" symbol.

  That is, the “7” symbol of the same color will not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “cherry” symbol of any color can be drawn on the winning line. “Red 7” in a position where the “Cherry” symbol of the same color will not stop on the winning line no matter what timing within the range where the “7” symbol of the same color can be drawn on the winning line Since the “Blue 7” symbol, “White 7” symbol, “Red Cherry” symbol, “Blue Cherry” symbol, and “White Cherry” symbol are arranged, the same color “Cherry” symbol and “7” There will be no stop operation position where the symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  In this embodiment, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the CPU 41a continues the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. On the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  In this embodiment, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. However, the rotation of the reel is started. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop each reel. May be. In this case, since the reels are stopped without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination is won.

  In this embodiment, after the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) are finished, the CPU 41a has the same lottery probability for the special role and the small role as in the normal gaming state, but the replay (1) and the replay (2). Replays where the winning probabilities are both higher than in the normal gaming state, and the medal payout rate per game (winning probability of the target role x total number of payouts / number of bets required for one game) exceeds 1. Control to time (1) (RT (1)). While the gaming state is at RT (1), the flag during RT (1) is set in the RAM 41c. Then, RT (1) does not win any special role, does not win replay (2), and wins the specified number of games (in this embodiment, 50 games, big after the end of big bonus (1)). Reach (20) if the bonus (2) is reached, or win any special role before reaching the specified number of games, or replay (2) wins, RT (2) described later It is supposed to end by moving to.

  In addition, when the replay (2) wins in the normal gaming state or in the state where no special role is won in RT (1), the special role (if any special role is not carried over) and the small role The lottery probability is the same as the normal gaming state, but the winning probability of replay (1) is higher than that of the normal gaming state and RT (1), and the winning probability of replay (2) is higher than that of the normal gaming state. The replay time (2) (RT (2)) is controlled such that the payout rate of medals per game is higher than that of RT (1). While the gaming state is at RT (2), the flag during RT (2) is set in the RAM 41c. Then, RT (2) does not win any special roles, reaches any of the specified number of games (200 games in this embodiment) without winning any of the cherries, or before reaching the specified number of games. It ends with either winning a special role or winning one of the cherries. Also, if any special role is won during RT (2), RT (2) will not end even if any cherry wins, and the specified number of games will be reached. The RT (2) will not end until the winning special role wins. Also, during RT (2), any of the cherries and special roles will be won at the same time, and even if the winning cherries win, RT (2) will not end and the number of games will be reached or won. The RT (2) does not end until the special role is won.

  The payout rate of medals per game in the normal gaming state is 0.62 according to the lottery probability in FIG. 10, and approximately 1.14 medals decrease per game, but red cherry, blue Cherries and white cherries cannot simultaneously aim for the symbols that make up these roles, and the actual appearance rate is 1/3, so the actual payout rate per game in the normal gaming state is 0.58, and the number of medals decreases by about 1.26 per game.

  The substantial payout rate of medals per game in RT (1) is 1.19, and medals increase by about 0.58 per game. The actual payout rate of medals per game in RT (2) is 1.29, and the number of medals increases by about 0.88 per game. RT (2) ends when winning a cherry, so when a cherry win is avoided in order to continue RT (2), the actual payout rate per game is 1 .27, and approximately 0.82 medals will be added per game.

  Thus, the substantial payout rate of medals per game is such that RT (2)> RT (1)> normal game state is established.

  In this embodiment, if any cherry wins during RT (2), if no special role has been won, RT even before reaching the specified number of games from the start of RT (1) (2) will end, but each of the “Red Cherry”, “Blue Cherry” and “White Cherry” symbols on the left reel will be red reel, blue cherry and white cherry. Since only one each is placed, a combination of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry will be available unless a stop operation is performed within the draw range of 4 frames on the winning line where red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry can be combined. In addition, even if the symbols that make up the special combination on the left reel stop on any of the winning lines, Symbol constructing the combined are spaced four or more intervals, for stopping operation position is not retracted the configuration pattern is present, can be avoided that the combination of the special role are aligned. As a result, if any cherry or special role is elected by performing a stop operation with an operation procedure that avoids the combination of red cherry, blue cherry, white cherry, or special role, either It is possible to avoid the end of RT (2) due to the winning of a cherry or special role.

  However, the “Red Cherry”, “Blue Cherry”, and “White Cherry” symbols of the left reel that make up the red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line. 2) If one of the cherries is won, it is impossible to intentionally remove the cherry if the type is not known, and the winning cherries will be missed with a probability of 2/3. If the winning cherries win with a probability of 1/3 and no special role is won, RT (2) will end.

  The CPU 41a determines whether or not the overflow tank 35 is full based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a. If it is determined that the overflow tank 35 is full, the reset operation (reset switch 23 or reset / setting switch 38) is determined. It is controlled to a full error state that disables the progress of the game until the operation is performed.

  22 and 23 are timing charts relating to the control of the full tank error state by the CPU 41a.

  In the figure, reel rotation indicates a state in which the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating, and medal payout indicates a state in which a medal payout operation is performed by driving the hopper motor 34b in response to winning of a small role. The replay game flag indicates the setting status of the replay game flag that is set in the RAM 41c from when the replay is won until the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are all stopped in the next game. , Indicates the detection state of the full sensor 35a, the inserted medal sensor signal indicates the detection state of the inserted medal by the inserted medal sensor 31, and the full flag indicates the detection status of the full sensor 35a (the detection flag indicating the detection state of the full sensor 35a). Is set in the RAM 41c when it is determined that the overflow tank is full. It indicates the setting status of full Tanfuragu error indicates the occurrence of full Tan'era accompanying that full state is determined. In the figure, the game start is the timing when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started, and the game control end is the timing when the medal payout ends when the medal payout is accompanied. When there is no payout, it is the timing when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped.

  The CPU 41a monitors the output state of the detection signal output from the full sensor 35a in the switch input determination process performed every 2.24 ms in the timer interrupt process. In the switch input determination process, when input determination of other switches (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) is performed, the state is switched from the off state to the on state, and continuously (for a certain period of time) The number of times assigned for each switch type) On the condition that the switch is determined to be ON, the ON state of the switch is determined and the detection flag of the switch is set in the RAM 41c. As for 35a, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by switching from the off state to the on state, and the detection flag of the sensor is set in the RAM 41c. Yes. This is because the full sensor 35a is driven at a higher voltage than the other switches, and even if noise or the like occurs, there is little voltage fluctuation and erroneous detection is less likely to occur. In this way, in the switch input determination process, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by the detection signal of the full sensor 35a changing from off to on, and the duration from when the full sensor 35a changes from off to on. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination of the detection state of the full sensor 35a.

  The CPU 41a determines whether or not the state is full based on the detection state (the presence or absence of a detection flag) of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected after the game control is finished. If the full tank sensor 35a is in the on state, it is determined that the tank is full, and a full tank flag indicating the full tank state is set in the RAM 41c. Note that in the next game in which the re-game player wins, the insertion of medals is not permitted until the end of the game, so the insertion of medals is not detected effectively, and the re-game player wins the prize. In the next game, it is not determined whether or not the tank is full. Even if the full sensor 35a is detected, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. In the present embodiment, the inserted medal sensor 31 is detected even when the insertion of medals is not permitted. However, even if the insertion of medals is detected during the replay game, it is effective. It is not determined that a medal has been inserted, and in this case as well, it is not determined whether the tank is full. Further, in this embodiment, even when the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the bet number is set using the credit, and even when the game starts without the medal being inserted, Even in such a case, it is not determined whether or not the tank is full, and even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected, it is not determined that the tank is full and the full tank flag is set. It never happens.

  Further, the CPU 41a determines whether or not the full tank flag is set at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the full tank flag is determined. Is set, the progress of the game is disabled, and a full error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. Note that the CPU 41a determines whether or not the replay game in-process flag is set in the RAM 41c before determining whether or not the full tank flag is set after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the game is a replay game. If it is a replay game, it is not determined whether the full tank flag is set. In such a case, even if the full tank flag is set, the full tank error state is entered. If the replay game ends without being controlled and is not a replay game, the full tank flag is determined at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), at the time when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, it is determined whether or not it is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. If the tongue sensor 35a is on, it is determined that the tank is full, and a full tank flag is set in the RAM 41c. After that, if the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, after the control of the game is finished, the full-game error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted. On the other hand, when the re-gamer wins in the game and the replay game flag is set (not shown), the full game error state is not controlled after the game ends, and the next game (replay game) After the completion of, the full-error error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game (or the next game if the next game is also a replay game) can be inserted. That is, in the game next to the game in which the re-game player wins, the full tank error state is not controlled.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 23, in the game next to the game won by the re-gamer, the insertion of medals is not permitted and the insertion of medals is not detected effectively. Even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected in the state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, when the re-player is not won in the game and the medal can be inserted, it is determined that the medal is inserted for the first time when the medal is detected, and the game is full. If the tongue flag is set in the RAM 41c and the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, it is controlled to a full tank error state at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the end of the control of the game.

  Although not particularly illustrated, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, if the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without the medal being inserted, No charging is detected, and even if the full sensor 35a is detected in such a state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, the medal can be inserted, and when the insertion of the medal is first detected, it is determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is set in the RAM 41c. In other words, a game is played by setting the number of bets using credits, and if no medal is inserted during that time, a full tank error state is not determined until the next game where a medal is inserted. There is no control.

  Next, a modified example of the control in the full tank error state will be described based on the timing charts shown in FIGS.

  In the figure, the medal insertion flag indicates a setting state of the medal insertion flag set in the RAM 41c from the detection of the medal insertion to the time when the medal insertion is permitted after the next game after the end of the game control.

  The CPU 41a determines whether or not it is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing before the medal insertion of the next game is permitted after the end of the game control. Note that the CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game based on the replay game flag before determining whether or not the tank is full. It is determined whether or not the medal insertion flag is set, that is, whether or not a medal is inserted in the previous game, and only when it is determined that the medal insertion flag is set, whether or not the state is full Is supposed to do. For this reason, when the re-gamer wins in the previous game and no medals need to be inserted in the game (when the game is a replay game), or the bet number is set using credits in the previous game, When the game is started without being inserted, it is not determined that the tank is full even if the full sensor 35a is detected.

  In addition, when the CPU 41a determines that the game is full, the game progress is disabled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and is controlled to the full error state until a reset operation is performed. . Note that the CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game before determining whether or not the game is full after the game control is finished. The determination is not performed. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled. On the other hand, if it is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not a medal is inserted in the previous game, and if no medal is inserted in the previous game, it is not determined whether or not it is full. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled, and if a medal is inserted in the previous game, the game control after the next game is over and the next It is determined whether or not the game medal of the game is full at a timing before the game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 24, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control ends, and the next game is a replay game. If not, it is further determined whether or not a medal has been inserted in the previous game, and if a medal has been inserted in the previous game, it is determined whether or not the full state is detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. When it is determined that the full tank state is reached, the full tank error state is controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 25, after the game control is finished, when the medal insertion flag is not set, that is, when the number of bets is set using credits in the previous game, and the game starts without inserting medals. In this state, it is not determined whether or not the full tank state is reached. Even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in this state, it is controlled to the full tank error state after the game control of the game is finished. There is nothing. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 26, when the next game is a replay game after the game control is completed, that is, when the re-game player wins in the previous game and it is not necessary to insert medals in the game, It is not determined whether or not the vehicle is in the tan state, and even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in such a state, the full tank error state is not controlled after the game control of the game is finished. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work that stores data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time counter. The general work is a work in which data that can be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus, are stored. The special work is a work that stores data to be initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. After initializing 0 before setting is started (before shifting to the setting change mode), 1 is stored. The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is satisfied by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. However, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 is activated when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are ON, when a RAM error occurs, and only the setting key switch 37 is ON. When starting up, at the end of the big bonus, at the time of starting up with both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 being OFF, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, the initialization consists of six at the end of one game. When the condition is satisfied, five types of initializations in different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and initialization is performed before the transition to the setting change mode or when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In initialization 0, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the storage area of the RAM 41c other than the used stack area are initialized. Initialization 1 is an initialization performed only when the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, in the storage area of the RAM 41c, All areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) other than the in-use stack area and the stop phase work are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the big bonus. In initialization 2, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of activation, and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The stored work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  As described above, in order to start the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. If the data in the RAM 41c including the data indicating the stop phase is initialized, it is impossible to specify the stop phase of the reel motor after changing the setting. When the reel motor is rotated for the first time, it is excited rapidly. The phase is attracted by the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a, and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, only the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of startup, and the RAM 41c is initialized when shifting to the setting change mode, but the stationary phase work is not initialized. Thus, even in the gaming state after the setting change, data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work is maintained. Therefore, even when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are rotated for the first time after the setting is changed, it is possible to specify these stop phases, and even in such a situation, the reels can be smoothly started to rotate. It becomes possible.

  In addition, both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an ON state at the time of starting, and the RAM 41c including the stop phase work can be initialized when shifting to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to initialize the stationary phase work according to the operation method when shifting to the setting change mode at the time of activation.

  Next, commands that the CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 makes a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a command, a standby command, a stop command, an error command, an initialization command, a setting end command, and a power-on command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted each time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command is a game state of the next game (whether it is a normal game state, during RT (1), during RT (2), during a big bonus, during a regular bonus, Etc.) and RT (1) (2) are commands that can specify the number of remaining games, and are transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized and the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the RAM 41c is initialized and shifts to the setting change mode.

  The setting end command is a command indicating the end of the setting change mode, and is transmitted at the end of setting, that is, at the end of the setting change mode.

  The power-on command is a command that indicates whether or not one of the special roles has been won at power-on, and if it can be restored to the state before the power interruption at startup, it returns to the state before the power interruption. Sent at a time before

  Each of these commands is generated in an activation process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a command queue provided in a special work in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 receives the command transmitted by the CPU 41a, the CPU 91a refers to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b and based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table, the liquid crystal display 51, the rendering effect Various rendering devices such as the LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are controlled.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the CPU 91a receives a command, the CPU 91a receives among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. The control device corresponding to the type of the command is referred to, and the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the CPU 91a receives a new command during the execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and performs control corresponding to the newly received command. An effect based on the pattern is executed. In other words, even when the effect has not been completed until the end, when a new command is received, the effect that has been executed is canceled and the effect based on the new command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, the CPU 91a is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table contains specific controls that are referred to when a specific command (standby command, stop command, error command, initialization command, setting end command, power-on command indicating that special role is elected, etc.) is received. When the pattern is stored and the CPU 91a receives these specific commands, the CPU 91a refers to the specific control pattern corresponding to the command regardless of the effect pattern set in the game, and The effect device is controlled based on the above.

  When a standby command is received, a demo pattern for executing a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) is referred to as a control pattern. In addition, when continuous effects and additional effects to be described later are being executed, the results of these effects are the results indicating the winning of the bonus, and when the final effects to be described later are executed in the setting operation of the betting number of the next game, When the final production is being executed, or when the production during the bonus accompanying the big bonus is being executed, execution of the demonstration production is prohibited. However, the demo pattern is not referred to as the control pattern, and the demonstration effect is not executed.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described demo pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the demonstration effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning.

  When the initialization command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the setting end command is received, the demo pattern described above is referred to as a control pattern. In other words, when an initialization command is received, a notification during setting change is executed, and when a setting end command is received thereafter, a demonstration effect is executed.

  When a power-on command indicating that a special role is won is received, a special role notification pattern for notifying that the special role has been won is referred to. That is, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is won is received, a notification effect for notifying that the special role is won is executed. Note that the notification effect for notifying the winning of the special combination is once executed until it receives a winning determination command indicating that the special combination has won.

  When the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 detects the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98 and when the V blank interrupt signal from the display control circuit 92 is not input for a certain period, the display control circuit 92 If the completion interrupt signal corresponding to the command is not input for a certain period of time despite the command for, the power interruption processing (sub) similar to the power interruption processing (main) is executed. . In the power interruption interrupt process (sub), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and data for destructive diagnosis (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit becomes 1 in the RAM 91c of the sub control unit 91, that is, In addition to storing specific data other than 0, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 91c. ing. Thereafter, the CPU 91a shifts to a loop process in which no processing is performed. However, when the V blank interrupt signal from the display control circuit 92 is not input for a certain period of time, or even though the display control circuit 92 is instructed. In the case of the power interruption interruption process performed when the completion interruption signal corresponding to the instruction is not input for a certain period, the drive voltage is not lowered, and then the reset circuit 95 When the reset signal is output from the CPU 91a, the CPU 91a is restarted.

  The CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of startup (restart), confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, and the RAM parity is 0. On the condition that the value of the data for destruction diagnosis is also correct, the effect state before power interruption (specifically, the state when the last command was received before power interruption) is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c. It is like that. Specifically, the control pattern executed last is referred to and control based on the control pattern is executed. As a result, an effect based on the control pattern executed before power interruption is executed from the beginning. Further, when the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of startup is not 0 (in the case of 1) or the value of the destructive diagnosis data is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. All areas of the RAM 91c are initialized.

  Thus, in this embodiment, not only when the CPU 91a detects the voltage drop signal, but also when the V blank interrupt signal from the display control circuit 92 described later is not input for a certain period, The power interruption interrupt process (sub) is executed even when the completion interrupt signal corresponding to the instruction is not input for a certain period of time despite the instruction, that is, when the display control circuit 92 hangs up for some reason. After that, the CPU 91a is restarted. As the CPU 91a is restarted, the display control circuit 92 is initialized so that the control of the CPU 91a is resumed from the state before the display control circuit 92 is hung up.

  In addition, the CPU 91a receives an initialization command or a power-on command before actually starting the production regardless of whether or not the production state before power interruption can be restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c at the time of activation. Wait until either is received. When the initialization command is received in this state, the data in the RAM 91c is cleared. In addition, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is received in this state, a notice effect indicating that the special role is elected is executed, and when a power-on command indicating that the special role is not elected is received, If it is possible to return to the performance state before the power interruption, the demonstration is performed. Also, in the state of waiting for receiving the initialization command or the power-on command, the execution of the timer interrupt process that executes the presentation based on the reception of the command is not permitted, and even when other commands are received, An effect based on the command is not performed, and no effect is performed until the initialization command or the power-on command is received after the startup and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted.

  On the other hand, if the V blank interrupt signal from the display control circuit 92 described later is not input for a certain period of time, the CPU 91a outputs a completion interrupt signal corresponding to the command, even though it instructs the display control circuit 92. When no input is made for a certain period, that is, when the display control circuit 92 hangs up for some reason, a restart flag is set in the RAM 91c before the power interruption processing (sub) is executed, By determining whether or not there is a restart flag, it is possible to distinguish whether it is a start-up due to power-on or a restart due to a hang-up of the display control circuit 92.

  If the CPU 91a determines that the display control circuit 92 is restarted due to a hang-up, and if the CPU 91a can return to the effect state before the restart, the CPU 91a does not wait for the reception of the initialization command or the power-on command. It is designed to return to the production state before startup. For this reason, although the CPU 91a is not activated by turning on the power but restarted by the hang-up of the display control circuit 92, the initialization command and the power-on command cannot be received, and the production is not performed. Can be prevented.

  When the internal winning command is received, the CPU 91a stores the winning status of the internal winning flag specified from the internal winning command and the type of the internal winning flag established in the RAM 91c, and then receives and updates the internal winning command. Hold until When the reel stop command is received, the stop reel specified from the reel stop command, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, and the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel are stored in the RAM 91c, and then the reel rotation start command Is held, that is, until the rotation of the reel in the next game is started, and erased as the rotation starts. When a winning determination command is received, the presence / absence of a winning specified from the winning determination command, the type of winning, and the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are stored in the RAM 91c until the winning determination command is received and updated. Hold. When the gaming state command is received, the gaming state of the next game specified from the gaming state command (the normal gaming state, the RT (1), the RT (2), the big bonus, Whether the game is in regular bonus, etc.) and the remaining number of games of RT (1) are stored in the RAM 91c, and held until the next game state command is received and updated.

  When the CPU 91a receives a standby command from the main control unit 41, that is, when an operation for advancing the game is not performed continuously for a certain time after the end of one game, and the number of credits or bets When the settlement operation is performed, a predetermined demonstration image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to perform the demonstration effect described above. In addition, when a continuous effect or an additional effect, which will be described later, is executed, when a confirmed effect is executed by setting the number of bets, when a confirmed effect is already executed, when a big bonus effect is executed Is a standby command from the main control unit 41 when a standby command is received from the main control unit 41 without a continuous operation for a certain period of time or when a credit or bet amount is settled. Even if it is received, the demonstration performance is not performed. In addition, in a state where a continuous effect, an additional effect, and a big bonus effect, which will be described later, are being performed, a game sound effect (BGM) is output even after the game ends while the effect continues. When the standby command is received in such a state, the demonstration effect is not performed, but the control is performed so that the volume is minimized (silence), and then the bet number setting operation is performed as the game progresses, and the BET When a command is received, the volume that is being muted is restored to the original level.

  When the CPU 91a receives an error command indicating the occurrence of an error from the main control unit 41, that is, when any error occurs on the main control unit 41 side, the CPU 91a displays an error notification screen indicating the occurrence of the error on the liquid crystal display 51. Thus, the occurrence of an error is notified to the outside. The error notification effect is continuously executed until an error command indicating the cancellation of the error is received from the main control unit 41. The error notification is terminated by receiving the error command indicating the error cancellation, and is executed when an error occurs. It returns to the production state that it had been.

  When a predetermined time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed after the reel rotation has started, that is, after acquiring the reel rotation start command, the CPU 91a does not acquire a reel stop command for all the reels for a predetermined time ( In this embodiment, when 60 seconds) elapses, a promotion notification that prompts a stop operation of the reel is performed. In addition, particularly in a state where a continuous effect, an additional effect, or a big bonus effect is performed, in addition to the promotion notification when a predetermined time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed after the reel starts rotating, Control is performed to minimize (mute) the volume of the game sound effect, and thereafter, when a reel stop command is received for all reels, the volume being muted is returned to the original level.

  As an effect performed by the CPU 91a of the present embodiment, particularly as an effect performed on the liquid crystal display 51, RT (1) executed when the gaming state is at RT (1), RT (2), or a big bonus, respectively. Production, RT (2) production or big bonus production, continuous execution over multiple games, and continuous production and additional production that lead to the production result indicating whether or not the bonus has been won, and the normal gaming state Or, in RT (1) and RT (2), when either a general role or a special role is elected, an effect (small role notification effect, replay notification effect) indicating that the general character is elected There is also a single production including.

  In addition, the CPU 91a performs an effect indicating that any bonus is won or an effect indicating that any bonus is won during the RT (2) effect, except during the RT (2) effect described above. Later, when the RT (2) effect is finished, when the number of bets for the next game is initially set (when a medal is inserted, or when one BET switch 5 or MAXBET switch 6 is operated, That is, when the BET command is received for the first time, a confirmation screen indicating the confirmation of the bonus is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a confirmed effect for notifying the player that the winning of the bonus has been confirmed is executed. The final production will continue until the winning bonus is won (until the winning command indicating the winning bonus is received), and the winning bonus will be won (the winning bonus won) Is received).

  Next, the RT (2) production will be described. The RT (2) production is based on the case where the falling role (red cherry, blue cherry, white cherry) is won during RT (2) (internal winning indicating the winning of the falling role). In the case of receiving a flag), a falling combination winning notification for notifying that the falling combination has been won, and a falling combination type notification for notifying the type of the winning combination (type of the falling combination specified from the internal winning flag) are included. .

  The falling role type notification indicates that the red cherry was elected, the blue cherry was elected, the white cherry was elected, and the color indicating the winning (red, blue cherry if the red cherry was elected) Is notified that the winning combination is blue, and the white cherry is notified that the white cherry is won.

  Note that the fallen role type notification is not limited as long as the player can recognize the type of the fallen role, and the type of the fallen role itself, or the combination of symbols, the symbols that differ depending on the type of fallen role, It may be notified by displaying an image or the like suggesting the type on the liquid crystal display 51, or by turning on a corresponding LED, outputting a corresponding sound, or the like. Furthermore, a symbol that is an index of a different symbol depending on the type of the falling role (such as a symbol that is located near the constituent symbol of the falling role and stands out from the constituent symbol of the falling role), an image that suggests the index symbol, etc. You may make it alert | report.

  The CPU 91a makes a big changeover notice lottery to determine whether or not to perform a fallen combination type notification when a fallen combination that will end RT (2) by winning in RT (2) is won. When bonus (1) (2) is executed during RT (1) (2) and this winning combination lottery is won, the falling combination notification count is determined and the determined falling combination notification count is stored in the RAM 91c. Set. In addition, when the winning combination lottery is won while the number of falling combination notifications remains in the RAM 91c, the newly determined number of falling combination notifications is added to the number of falling combination notifications remaining in the RAM 91c. Then, in the state where any special combination is not won in RT (2), when any cherry wins (when an internal winning command indicating winning of any cherry is received), the number of falling combination notifications Is determined, and if the falling combination notification count remains, the falling combination type notification corresponding to the winning cherry is executed. In other words, when a red cherry is won, a falling role type notification that informs red that indicates the red cherry is won is executed, and when blue cherry is won, a falling role type that notifies the blue that indicates that the blue cherry is won is notified. The notification is executed, and when the white cherry is won, the falling role type notification for notifying the white indicating the winning of the white cherry is executed. In addition, when any special combination is won in RT (2), when any cherry is won, the number of falling combination notification is decremented by one every time the falling combination type notification is executed once. Therefore, when any of the cherries wins within the range in which the falling combination notification count remains, the falling combination type notification is executed. In RT (2), when any special role is not elected, when any cherry is elected, if there is no remaining falling role notification count, one of the falling roles is elected. The falling combination notification for notifying is performed.

  In this embodiment, if any cherry wins in a state where no special role is won in RT (2), RT (2) even before reaching the specified number of games from the start of RT (2). 2) will be completed, but as described above, the “Red Cherry”, “Blue Cherry” and “White Cherry” symbols on the left reel that make up Red Cherry, Blue Cherry and White Cherry are intentionally won. Since it cannot be stopped on the line, when any cherry is elected in the state where no special role is elected in RT (2), it is not possible to intentionally remove the cherry if the type is not known It is impossible and you will miss the winning cherries with a probability of 2/3, but the winning cherries will win with a probability of 1/3 and RT (2) will end. And will.

  On the other hand, when no special combination is won in RT (2), when any of the cherries wins, if the falling role type notification is executed, the player is suggested by the notified color. Depending on the selected color, it is possible to recognize which combination of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry was won, and the “red cherry” on the left reel that constitutes red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry It is possible to specify a stop operation position where the symbol, the “blue cherry” symbol, and the “white cherry” symbol are not intentionally stopped on the winning line.

  For this reason, in the state where no special combination is won in RT (2), if any cherry is selected, the player intentionally wins by executing the fallen combination type notification. By missing the cherry, it is possible to avoid the end of RT (2) accompanying the winning of the cherry.

  In addition, as described above, there is no stop operation position in which the similar color cherry and the “7” symbol can be aimed at the same time on the left reel, so the player aims at the “7” symbol of the color suggested by the fall type notification. By performing the reel stop operation, the winning color cherry does not win and the end of RT (2) can be avoided. That is, in the falling role type notification, in addition to notifying the type of the falling role won by the suggested color, the position serving as an index when avoiding winning of the falling role is also notified. .

  When the winning combination lottery in the big bonuses (1) and (2) is won, the CPU 91a executes a notification number lottery for selecting the falling combination notification number in the range of 1 to 4 times, and the winning combination notification is made. The number of times is set in the RAM 91c or, if already set in the RAM 91c, is added to the number of times.

  In the notification number lottery in the big bonuses (1) and (2), as shown in FIG. 27 (a), the ratio of selecting 1 to 4 times is the big bonus for executing the notification number lottery. (1) (Big Bonus transferred with the combination of “Red 7-Red 7-Red 7”) or Big Bonus (2) (Big Bonus transferred with the combination of “Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7”) In the notification number lottery executed when winning the falling combination notification lottery in the big bonus (1), the number of falling combination notifications is 1 time: 20%, 2 times: 20%, 3 times: 40%, 4 times: The ratio is selected at a rate of 20%, the average number of times is 2.6 times, and the number of notifications executed when the winning combination lottery in the big bonus (2) is won. In the lottery, the number of falls notice is 1 time: 50 , 2: 30%, 3: 15%, 4 times: being adapted to be selected at a rate of 5%, the average number is 1.75 times. That is, in the notification frequency lottery executed when the winning combination lottery is won in the big bonus (1), a relatively large number of notifications is executed when the falling bonus notification lottery is won in the big bonus (2). In the notification number lottery executed when the winning combination lottery is selected in the big bonus (2) and the winning combination lottery is selected in a big bonus (2), the number of notifications is relatively small. ) Is selected at a higher rate than the notification frequency lottery executed when the falling combination notification lottery is won. For this reason, a person who wins the falling role notification lottery with the big bonus (1) can expect to acquire more falling role notification times than the case where the big bonus (2) wins the falling role notification lottery. Yes.

  The CPU 91a, as a big bonus effect corresponding to the big bonus (1) (2), at the time of winning the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) among the effect modes of the BB effect modes A to C (big bonus) The big bonus effect of the effect mode selected by the player is executed when the winning determination command indicating the winning of (1) or big bonus (2) is received. Specifically, when the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is won, the BB effect modes A to C are periodically displayed in order on the liquid crystal display 51, and betting is performed at the timing when the desired BB effect mode is displayed. By performing a number setting operation (receiving a BET command), the BB effect mode displayed at that time is set. The BB effect mode is not limited to this, and the player may be able to select the BB effect mode by operating the selection switch 55 and the decision switch 56.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the CPU 91a executes the falling role notification lottery with different triggers according to the BB effect mode, and the winning probability at that time also applies different probabilities according to the BB effect mode. In addition, the notification that the winning combination lottery has been won is also made according to the BB effect mode.

  Specifically, when the BB effect mode A is selected, when the bell wins during the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) (when the winning determination command indicating the bell winning is received), The notice lottery is executed, and the winning probability at that time is about 4.4%. In addition, if the winning combination lottery is won, the fact that the winning combination lottery has been won is announced with a probability of 1/2 of the winning game (when receiving the winning determination command indicating the winning of a bell). If the big bonus is not notified before the end of the big bonus, the fact that the falling combination notification lottery is won is notified at the end of the big bonus (when a gaming state command indicating the end of the big bonus is received).

  When the BB effect mode B is selected, the falling combination notification lottery is executed when the player loses during the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) (when the internal winning command indicating the loss is received) In this case, the winning probability is 100%. In addition, when the winning combination lottery lottery is won, the fact that the winning combination lottery lottery is won immediately is notified.

  When the BB effect mode C is selected, when any cherry is won during the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) (when an internal winning command indicating winning of any cherry is received) ), The winning combination notification lottery is executed, and the winning probability at that time is about 68%. If the winning combination lottery is won, the fact that the winning combination lottery is won is notified at the end of the big bonus (when a gaming state command indicating the end of the big bonus is received).

  Note that, regardless of the BB effect modes A to C, the substantial probability of winning the falling combination notification lottery in each game in the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) (BB effect mode A: Bell winning probability ( Winning probability) x Winning probability of falling role announcement lottery, BB production mode B: Loss probability, BB production mode C: (Red cherry win probability + blue cherry win probability + white cherry win probability) / 3) is almost the same Probability (about 4%).

  Further, the CPU 91a is configured to execute the falling combination notification lottery even in a state where no special combination is won in RT (1) (2). As shown in FIG. 27 (b), in the state where no special combination is won during RT (1) (2), a fallen combination is made in the case of a loss (when an internal winning command indicating a loss is received). The notification lottery is executed, and the winning probability at that time is 5% at RT (1) and 20% at RT (2). Further, in this case, if the winning combination lottery lottery is won, the fact that the winning combination lottery lottery is won is notified at that time. And even if the winning combination for lottery notification is won in RT (1) and (2), the lottery for notifying the falling combination is executed in the range of 1 to 4 times. Or if it is already set in the RAM 91c, it is added to the number of times.

  In the notification frequency lottery executed in RT (1) (2), as shown in FIG. 27 (a), 1 to 4 times are selected at a rate of 25%.

  If any special combination and any cherry are elected at the same time when no special combination is carried over during RT (2), the CPU 91a falls if the number of falling combination notifications remains. The role type notification is executed. At this time, the number of falling combination notifications is not subtracted, the number of falling combination notifications at that time is newly stored as the number of temporary notifications, and the number of temporary notifications is subtracted once. If the number of falling combination notifications does not remain, a falling combination winning notification is executed. At this time, if the falling combination wins, at the time when the betting number setting operation of the next game is performed, the fact that the special combination has been won is notified, and the continuation of RT (2) is notified.

  In addition, when any of the special roles is carried over and the winning of the special role is not notified, any of the cherries wins, and the CPU 91a has the number of falling role notifications or the number of provisional notifications remaining. If so, the fall type combination notification is executed. At this time, the number of falling combination notifications is not subtracted. If the number of provisional notifications is already stored, the number of provisional notifications is subtracted once, and if the number of provisional notifications is not stored, the number of falling combinations notification is temporarily calculated. The number of notifications is newly stored, and the number of provisional notifications is subtracted once. If neither the number of falling combination notifications nor the number of provisional notifications remains, the falling combination winning notification is executed. At this time, if the falling combination wins, at the time when the betting number setting operation of the next game is performed, the fact that the special combination has been won is notified, and the continuation of RT (2) is notified.

  Whether the number of falling combination notifications or the number of provisional notifications remains when the CPU 91a wins any of the cherries in a state where any special combination is carried over and the special combination is notified Regardless of whether or not, the fall type combination notification is executed.

  In the present embodiment, RT (2) will not end even if any cherry wins in the state where any special role is won in RT (2), so either one in RT (2) After winning the special role of, red cherries, blue cherries and white cherries win more medals, but as mentioned above, the red reel, blue cherries and white cherries Since the “Red Cherry”, “Blue Cherry”, and “White Cherry” designs cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line, even if Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, or White Cherry wins, these Red Cherry, It is impossible to deliberately win a blue cherry or a white cherry. If you win these roles, you can win with a 1/3 chance, but with a 2/3 chance. Resulting in spilled.

  On the other hand, if any special role is elected in RT (2) and if the special role is announced, one of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry is won. At this time, when the falling combination type notification is executed, it is possible to recognize the winning combination, and it is possible to win all the red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries that have been won.

  As described above, in this embodiment, if any special role is not won in RT (2), when any cherry is won, RT (2) is won by winning the winning cherry. However, if any special role wins at RT (2), RT (2) will not end even if any of the cherries wins. Therefore, by winning the special combination in RT (2), it is possible to obtain more medals than before the special combination is won.

  In addition, in the state where any special combination is elected in RT (2) and that fact is notified, when any cherry is elected, the fall type combination notification is executed. It is possible to win a prize without missing the cherries. In the state where the special role is elected but not notified, the control is performed in the same manner as the state where the special role is not elected, that is, when any cherry is elected, If the number of notifications (temporary notification number) remains, the falling combination type notification is executed, and if the number of falling combination notifications (temporary notification number) does not remain, the falling combination winning notification is executed, so RT (2 ), The player can always have a sense of expectation for winning the special role even if the special role is not notified.

  In RT (2), when a special role and one of the cherries are elected at the same time without any special role being carried over, or when a special role is being won and either special role is being carried over If any of the cherries wins without being notified, and if the winning cherries wins, the winning of the special role will be notified in response to the betting number setting operation of the next game, and RT (2) Therefore, an unexpectedness can be given to the player who thought that RT (2) was finished.

  When the number of remaining games of RT (2) (the number of games until reaching the specified number of games and the number of remaining games of RT (2) indicated by the gaming state command) becomes 3 games, the CPU 91a determines that RT ( During the period until the end of 2) the continuous production is always executed over 3 games and the remaining number of games of RT (2) (the number of remaining games of RT (2) indicated by the gaming state command) becomes 6 games, When no winning combination is received (when a winning judgment command indicating a loss is received), a continuous production lottery is executed to determine whether or not to perform a continuous production, and 3 is also awarded when the continuous production lottery is won. Perform continuous production throughout the game.

  In the continuous performance, a winning pattern for finally informing the winning of the bonus and a loss pattern for informing that the bonus has not been won in the special role are determined. The CPU 91a determines the RT (2). When the number of remaining games is three games, if any special role is won at that time, a continuous production based on the winning pattern is always executed, and no special role is won Always performs a continuous production based on the loss pattern.

  On the other hand, in the continuous effect lottery, as shown in FIG. 28, even when one of the special roles is won, the loss pattern may be determined, and when one of the special roles is won. In the case where the lost pattern is determined in the continuous effect lottery, the continuous effect is executed based on the lost pattern that finally notifies the loss.

  Specifically, in the continuous effect lottery, when the big bonuses (1) to (3) are won, the winning pattern is determined with a probability of 5%, and the loss pattern is determined with a probability of 20%. If no special role is won, the loss pattern is determined with a probability of 20%, and the winning pattern is not determined.

  Then, the CPU 91a determines a winning pattern in the continuous effect lottery when one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won, executes a continuous effect based on the determined winning pattern, and plays a special role. The background selection lottery for selecting the background of the display screen in the RT (2) effect is performed by notifying the winning, and the background of the display screen in the RT (2) effect is selected in the background selection lottery. The background is changed.

  The background of the display screen in the RT (2) effect consists of three types, day, evening and night, and the background of the RT (2) effect always starts from noon. In the background selection lottery, if the big bonus (1) is won, the background is selected at the ratio of day: 50%, evening: 30%, night: 20%, and the big bonus (2) is won. If the background is selected, the background is selected at a ratio of 70% for the day, 20% for the evening, and 10% for the evening. If the big bonus (3) is selected, the day is 85% and the evening is 10%. %, Night: Select the background at a rate of 5%.

  In this way, in the background selection lottery, the evening and night are selected at a higher rate when the big bonus (2) is won than when the big bonus (3) is won, and the big bonus (1) If you are elected, the evening and night will be selected at a higher rate. For this reason, when the background is changed to evening or night, it is possible to expect the winning of the big bonus (1) which is more advantageous for the player. On the other hand, even when the big bonus (1) is won, the day is selected for 50% and the background may not be changed. Therefore, even if the background does not change, it can be expected that the big bonus (1) will be won. It has become.

  Next, continuous production will be described.

  All the continuous effects are performed by displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, the production for each individual game in the continuous production starts when the start switch 7 is operated (when the internal winning command is received), and when all the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped (all Is finished when a reel stop command is received for the reels. There are two types of performance results for each game other than the final game: player side attacks and player side damage, and final game results are two types of player wins and losses. However, there are many types of production processes.

  As described above, the continuous production is started when the number of remaining games of RT (2) (the number of remaining games of RT (2) indicated by the gaming state command) becomes three games or when the continuous production lottery is won. The In the continuous production of the winning pattern, when all the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped in the game (final game) in which the continuous production ends (when the reel stop command is received for all the reels). The fact that the bonus is won (player win) is definitely notified.

  Further, in the continuous production of the loss pattern, the result of the loss (losing the player) is notified as a result of the continuous production, that is, no special role is won. In addition, when a lost pattern is won in spite of being won for any special role in the continuous production lottery, the loss is intentionally notified, but the remaining RT (2) If no bonus is won in any of the three games and a continuous production based on the loss pattern is started, any bonus will be won between the start and the end of the continuous production. If the bonus won by the end does not win, the player will be informed of the content that is different from the situation at the end of RT (2) if the continuous production ends and the result of the loss is informed. Will end up.

  For this reason, in the continuous production of the loss pattern started in the remaining three games of RT (2), it is determined whether or not any special role is won after the production starts at the start of the final game. If you have not won any special role after the start, you will be notified of the result of the loss at the end of the game, and if you win any special role after the continuous production has started, The result of the production will be replaced and the fact that the special role has been won will be clearly announced, or the additional game will be executed in the next game without replacement, and it will be confirmed that the special role has been won by this additional production. Will be informed.

  In addition, the CPU 91a also wins red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries that may be won at the same time as the special role even in the normal gaming state or RT (1) (internal winning indicating the winning of any cherry). When the command is received), a continuous effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect is executed, and the continuous effect is executed over three games even when the continuous effect lottery is won. In the continuous effect lottery executed in the normal gaming state, execution of the continuous effect is determined with a higher probability than the continuous effect lottery executed in RT (1). The continuous production is executed at a higher frequency than during RT (1).

  The CPU 91a is executed regardless of whether or not the special combination is won as the one-time production described above in the normal gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2), but when the special combination is won The chance effect that indicates the possibility of winning the special role is executed by executing with a higher probability than when not winning the special role. The chance effect is executed when an effect pattern for chance effect is selected in an effect pattern selection process executed when an internal winning command is received. In the effect pattern selection process, the effect pattern for chance effect is selected with a higher probability in the normal gaming state than in RT (1) and RT (2), and in the normal gaming state, RT The chance effect is executed more frequently than during (1) and during RT (2).

  In addition, when the replay (1) or the special role is elected as the one-off effect in the normal gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2), the CPU 91a determines whether the replay (1) or the special role is selected. A replay notification effect indicating that the player has been selected is executed. The replay notification effect is basically executed when the replay (1) is won, and when the replay notification effect is executed, the replay (1) is won, but is executed when the special role is won. Since the replay (1) will not win, the replay notification effect will be executed, and the replay (1) will not win, suggesting that the special role is won. The replay notification effect is executed by selecting an effect pattern for the replay notification effect in the effect pattern selection process executed when the internal winning command is received. In the effect pattern selection process, when the replay (1) is won during RT (1) and RT (2), the replay notification effect is performed with a lower probability than when the replay (1) is won in the normal gaming state. The production pattern is selected.

  In addition, the CPU 91a receives a small role or a special role as a single effect during a normal gaming state, during RT (1), during RT (2), and during a big bonus (4) or big bonus (5) notification period described later. The small role notification effect indicating that either the small role or the special role is elected is executed. The small role announcement effect is basically executed when the small role is elected, and when the small role notification effect is executed, the small role will be won if the announced small role is not missed. However, if it is executed at the time of winning the special role, the small role will not win, so the small role notification effect is executed, and the winning of the special role is suggested by the fact that the small role does not win. The small role notification effect is executed by selecting an effect pattern for the small role notification effect in the effect pattern selection process executed when the internal winning command is received. The small role announcement production includes the first small role announcement production and the second small role announcement production. In the production pattern selection process, the special game is won in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2). When the small role is elected alone in a state where the first small role announcement effect is not selected, a higher pattern than the second small role notification effect effect pattern is selected, and the normal gaming state, Big bonus (4) when a special role is elected during RT (1), when a special role is elected while a special role is elected, when a special role is elected at the same time as a special role Alternatively, when a small role is elected during the announcement period described later of the big bonus (5), the production pattern for the second small role announcement production is selected at a higher rate than the production pattern for the first small role announcement. It has become.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 91a uses random numbers acquired from the same random number counter when performing the falling role notification lottery, the notification count lottery, the continuous effect lottery, the background selection lottery, and the effect pattern selection process. . That is, lottery is performed using random numbers acquired from the same random number counter for a plurality of types of lottery, and there is no need to provide a random number counter for each of these types of lottery. In the present embodiment, lottery is performed using random numbers acquired from the same random number counter for all these lotteries, but random numbers acquired from the same random number counter are used for all lotteries. Even if it is not used, the above effect can be obtained if random numbers acquired from the same random number counter are used for at least a plurality of types of lottery.

  Next, a bonus effect that is executed when the big bonus (4) or the big bonus (5) is won will be described.

  When the big bonus (4) or the big bonus (5) wins, the CPU 91a does not perform the effect indicating the big bonus winning as when the big bonus (1) to (3) wins. Continue playing the game state.

  Furthermore, the combination of the big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5) is smaller than a conspicuous symbol such as “7”, and the number arranged on each reel is “bell” and “replay”. It is composed of two or more kinds of symbols, making it difficult to understand that the winning line is aligned. Furthermore, the bonuses other than the big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5) are controlled so as to be aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4 arranged in a straight line across the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Regarding (4) and Big Bonus (5), the stopping positions of the upper, middle and lower stages are different in all reels, and are aligned with the winning lines L5 and L6 set across the symbols which are not located on a straight line. Therefore, it is more difficult to understand that the combination of the big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5) is aligned with the winning line.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 29, when the big bonus (4) or big bonus (5) wins and the game state shifts to the big bonus (4) or big bonus (5), the winning announcement is made in the notice period of up to three games. By performing the lottery and winning the prize announcement lottery, a bonus notification effect for notifying that the game has shifted to the big bonus (4) or the big bonus (5) is performed. If the winning lottery is not won during the notice period, the bonus notice effect is forcibly performed at the end of the three games.

  In addition, as described above, when the small role is elected alone in a state other than the notification period and when the special role is not elected, the first small role notification effect is higher than the second small role notification effect. On the other hand, when a small role is elected in the notification period, the second small role notification effect is executed at a higher rate than the first small role notification effect. The second small role notification effect that is executed in a state other than the notification period and in a state where the special role is not won is executed at a high frequency.

  After the bonus announcement effect, the first bonus effect is executed until the total payout number in the big bonus exceeds 100, which is the end condition of the big bonus (5), and the total payout number in the big bonus is 100. The first bonus effect ends with the game exceeding. In the case of the big bonus (5), the bonus effect is also terminated at the same time as the end of the big bonus (5), whereas in the case of the big bonus (4), any one until the end of the next game is reached. (The timing for setting the number of bets, start operation, or stop operation is determined by lottery), and the total number of payouts in the big bonus becomes the end condition of the big bonus (4) 300 The second bonus effect is executed until the number exceeds the number, and the second bonus effect ends with the game in which the total number of payouts in the big bonus exceeds 300, and the bonus effect ends with the end of the big bonus (4) To do.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs a betting number settlement operation when a certain amount of time (30 seconds) has elapsed without a betting number setting operation being performed after the game ends, and a credit settlement operation is performed. When it comes to send a wait command.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 continuously outputs the game sound effect by the continuous effect or the bonus effect, when the standby command is received, the game effect being output at the normal volume (MAX). Control to mute the sound (silence control) is performed.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 30 (a), in the state in which the game sound effects are continuously output by the continuous effect or the bonus effect, the game progress operation is not performed after the end of the game, and for a certain time (30 seconds). ) Elapses, control (silence control) is performed to lower the game sound effect being output at the normal volume (MAX).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), in a state in which game sound effects are continuously output by a continuous effect or a bonus effect, even before a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the game ended. When a credit settlement operation is performed, control (mute control) is performed to reduce the game sound effect being output at the normal volume (MAX) without waiting for a certain period of time.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 is configured not to transmit a standby command regardless of the time that has elapsed since the end of the game in the state where the number of bets is set.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), in a state in which game sound effects are continuously output by continuous effects and bonus effects, the number of bets before a certain time (30 seconds) elapses after the game ends. Is set, the game sound effects are not muted even after a certain period of time has elapsed after the game ends, and after that, the betting amount is settled and the game sound effects are Silence control is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), in a state in which game sound effects are continuously output by a continuous effect or a bonus effect, the bet number is increased before a predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses after the game ends. Even if the set amount is set and before a certain period of time has elapsed since the game ended, when the betting amount is settled and a standby command is transmitted, the normal volume (MAX) is not waited for the certain period of time to elapse. Control to mute the game sound effect being output (silence control) is performed.

  The CPU 91a returns the game sound effect to the normal sound volume (MAX) when the bet number is set after the mute control is performed, that is, when the BET command is received after receiving the standby command. Yes.

  In addition, in a state where the bet number has already been set, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a standby command even when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the game. For this reason, the CPU 91a does not perform a demonstration effect even if a certain amount of time has passed since the game ends if the number of bets has already been set and the player is willing to start the game. ing.

  Further, in a state where the bet number has already been set, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a standby command even when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the game. Even when the sound effects are continuously output, the CPU 91a is in a state in which the player is willing to start the game, and thus does not perform control to mute the game sound effects.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the CPU 41a performs a startup process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the main control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the CPU 41a is activated when the power is turned on and when the CPU 41a is activated due to a malfunction. This is a process to be performed.

  In the start-up process, first, the built-in device and peripheral IC (excluding disconnection monitoring IC 50), interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa1), then the voltage drop signal detection data is acquired from the input port, and the voltage drop It is determined whether or not a signal is input, that is, whether or not the voltage is stable (Sa2), and when a voltage drop signal is input, other than whether or not a voltage drop signal is input Shifts to a loop process that does not perform any process.

  If it is determined in step Sa2 that the voltage drop signal is not input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3), and the states of the stop switch 36 and the automatic settlement switch 29 are acquired. Validity / invalidity of the stop function and automatic settlement function is set in a specific register of the CPU 41a (Sa4). By the initialization of the I register and the IY register, the address of the interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and the reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa5), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sa6). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state at step Sa6, the storage state of the disconnection flag is acquired from the disconnection monitoring IC 50 (Sa7), and it is determined whether the disconnection flag is stored (Sa8). If the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not released during a power failure, the disconnection flag is If the disconnection flag is stored, the state of electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 or the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 is not stored. Therefore, the error code indicating the disconnection abnormality is set in the register (Sa9), and the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG.

  If the disconnection flag is not stored in step Sa8, the RAM parities of all the storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c are calculated (Sa10), and whether the RAM parity is 0 or not. Is determined (Sa11). If the interruption interrupt process (main) is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa11, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa13), and the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa11, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa12). If power interruption interrupt processing (main) is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa12 (data for destruction diagnosis is power interruption) Since the data in the RAM 41c is not normal also in cases other than 5A (H) stored at the time), an error code indicating RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa13), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG.

  In the error processing, as shown in FIG. 33, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sb1), and the error code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb2). .

  Next, the error code stored in the register is checked, and it is determined whether or not the error code is an error code indicating a disconnection error, a RAM error, or an abnormal winning error (Sb3). If the error code indicates an abnormal error or abnormal winning error, initialization 0 for initializing all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area is performed (Sb4). The process proceeds to a loop process that does not perform any process.

  If it is determined in step Sb3 that the error code is not an error other than a disconnection error, a RAM error, and an abnormal winning error, it is determined whether an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected. (Sb5) If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected (Sb6). If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, Return to step Sb5. That is, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is detected.

  When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step Sb5 or when the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step Sb6, the error code stored in the register is cleared (Sb7 ), The display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the display state saved in the stack in the step Sb1 (Sb8), and the process returns to the original process.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is other than the disconnection abnormality error, the RAM abnormality error, and the abnormal winning error, the error state can be canceled by operating the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23. However, if the error processing is due to a disconnection error, a RAM error, or an abnormal winning error, initialization 0 is performed to initialize all the storage areas of the RAM 41c except the used stack area. When the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated, the error state is canceled and the original state is not restored.

  Returning to FIG. 32, if it is determined in step Sa12 that the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the non-saved work, the unused area, and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are initialized. After performing initialization 3 (Sa14), the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa15). Next, it is determined whether any special role is won in the state before the power interruption (Sa16). If any special role is elected in the state before the power interruption, A power-on command indicating winning is set (Sa17), and the process proceeds to step Sa19. If no special role is won in the state before power interruption, a power-on command indicating non-winning special role is set. (Sa18), the process proceeds to step Sa19.

  In step Sa19, each register is restored to the state before power interruption, that is, stored in the stack, interrupt is permitted (Sa20), and the process executed last before power interruption is returned to. When interrupt is permitted in step Sa20, timer interrupt processing is periodically executed, and accordingly, the power-on command set in step Sa17 or Sa18 is sent to sub-control unit 91. Sent.

  If the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state in step Sa6, it is determined whether the reset / setting switch 38 is in the ON state (Sa21). If the reset / setting switch 38 is in the ON state in step Sa21, after executing initialization 0 for initializing all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sa22), Sa24 Go to step. On the other hand, if the reset / setting switch 38 is in the OFF state in the step of Sa21, after executing initialization 1 for initializing all the storage areas of the storage area of the RAM 41c except the stop phase work and the used stack area. (Sa23), the process proceeds to step Sa24.

  In step Sa24, the value stored in the set value work (0 at this time) is corrected to 1. Next, after setting the initialization command (Sa25), the interruption is permitted (Sa26), and the setting change process shown in FIG. 34, that is, the setting change mode is entered (Sa27). When the interrupt is permitted in the step of Sa26, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed. Accordingly, the initialization command set in the step of Sa25 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. . After the setting change process in step Sa27 is completed, a setting end command is set (Sa28), and the process proceeds to the game process. The initialization command set in step Sa28 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process.

  In the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 34, the setting value stored in the setting value work of the RAM 41c (the value of the setting value work is corrected to 1 before shifting to the setting changing process. Is read out (Sc1).

  Thereafter, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (Sc2, Sc3). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sc2, the setting value read in the step of Sc1. 1 is added (Sc4), and it is determined whether or not the set value after addition is 7, that is, whether or not the settable range is exceeded (Sc5). If the set value after addition is not 7, After returning to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3 again, if the setting value after addition is 7 in the step Sc5, the setting value is corrected to 1 (Sc6). ), The process returns to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3.

  When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in the step of Sc3, the changed set value selected at that time is stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c and the set value is confirmed (Sc7). Wait until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (Sc8). If it is determined in step Sc8 that the setting key switch 37 is OFF, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 32 and the process proceeds to game processing.

  As described above, in the starting process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is determined whether or not a disconnection flag is stored. If the disconnection flag is stored, the process proceeds to an error process. Further, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal by determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 and whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is normal, and the data in the RAM 41c is normal. If not, the process proceeds to error processing. In the error processing due to the disconnection error error or the RAM error error, the error code indicating the disconnection error error or the RAM error error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and then initialized so that it cannot return to the state before the power interruption. To initialize the RAM 41c and shift to a loop process in which no process is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the interrupt is not permitted. Therefore, once the process proceeds to error processing due to a disconnection error or RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and the interrupt is interrupted. Until interruption is permitted, the interruption interruption process (main) is not performed even if the interruption occurs. That is, the RAM adjustment data is not calculated and stored so that the RAM parity is newly set to 0 in the power interruption interrupt process (main), and the destruction diagnosis data is not newly set. Even if the CPU 41a is restarted, the game cannot be restarted even if the CPU 41a is restarted, except when the setting key switch 37 is started in the ON state.

  Once the process proceeds to error processing due to disconnection error or RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, and then the setting change process is performed. Until the setting value is newly selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38, the game cannot be progressed. In other words, in the state where the error processing due to the RAM abnormality error is started, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is resumed on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. It becomes possible to make it.

  In addition, when the setting key switch 37 is activated with only the ON state, initialization 1 for initializing all the storage areas of the storage area of the RAM 41c except the stop phase work and the used stack area is executed. After that, when the setting key mode 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both activated while the mode is changed to the setting change mode, all of the storage areas of the RAM 41c except the stack area in use are stored. After the initialization 0 for initializing the storage area is executed, the mode changes to the setting change mode, and only the setting key switch 37 is activated or the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting are reset. Whether to initialize with both of the switches 38 being turned on, leaving data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R depending on whether the switch 38 is activated. Or initialization including, it is possible to select a.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are sequentially executed. When the end-time process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where the bet number can be set, sets a predetermined number of bets according to the gaming state, and executes a process of determining the bet number when the start switch 7 is operated. To do.

  In the internal lottery process in step Sd2, a random number for internal lottery is extracted simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in step Sd1, and the winning of each above-described combination is permitted based on the extracted random number value. Process to determine whether or not. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

  In the reel rotation process in the step of Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the operation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R detected by the player are detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed.

  In the winning determination process in the step Sd4, when it is determined in the step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the payout process in step Sd5, when it is determined that a prize is generated in step Sd4, processing such as addition of credits and payout of medals is performed based on the number of payouts according to the win.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed. Further, in the game end process, an RT process for performing control related to RT is also performed.

  36 and 37 are flowcharts showing the control content of the BET process executed by the CPU 41a in the step Sd1.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se1), and a prescribed number (3 regardless of the gaming state in this embodiment) is set in the RAM 41c. Then, based on whether or not the replay game flag indicating that it is a replay game is set in the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se3).

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is a replay game, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (Se4), the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the BET counter is It is determined whether or not the number is a prescribed number (Se5), and if the value of the BET counter is not the prescribed number, the process returns to the step of Se4. The RAM 41c is set (Se6), and the process proceeds to Se10.

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set in the RAM 41c, that is, whether or not the full state of the overflow tank 35 has been determined before the previous game. If the full tank flag is set, an error code indicating a full tank error is set in the register (Se8), and the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG.

  If the full flag is not set in the step of Se7, the setting before waiting for input is performed (Se9), and the process proceeds to the step of Se10. In the setting before waiting for insertion, the insertion disable flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared, the detection of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the settlement switch 10 is enabled, and the insertion of a medal is detected. When this is done, the first insertion flag indicating that the medal is the first inserted medal after the previous game control is finished is set in the RAM 41c.

  In the step of Se10, it is determined whether or not a medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM 41c. If it is determined in step Se10 that the medal can be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal can be inserted using the medal flow path as a path on the hopper tank side. (Se11), the process proceeds to step Se13, and if it is determined that the medal cannot be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the off state, and the medal flow path is the path on the medal payout exit 9 side. As a result, the insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se12), and the process proceeds to Step Se13.

  In step Se13, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensor 31 has detected passage of the inserted medal. If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected in the step of Se13, the process proceeds to the step of Se24. If the passage of the inserted medal is detected, the insertion of the medal is performed based on whether or not the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is possible to enter a medal (Se14). If the medal cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to Step Se24.

  If the medal can be inserted in the step of Se14, it is determined whether or not the first insertion flag is set in the RAM 41c based on whether or not the first insertion flag is set in the RAM 41c (Se15). If it is not the first input after the end of the game control, the process proceeds to step Se19. If the first input is after the end of the game control, the first input flag is cleared (Se16), and whether or not the full sensor 35a is detected is determined. Determine (Se17). If the full tank sensor 35a is not detected in step Se17, the process proceeds to step Se19. If the full sensor 35a is detected, a full tank flag indicating the full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is set in the RAM 41c (Se18). The process proceeds to Se19.

  In step Se19, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to determine whether the value of the BET counter is a specified number. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the value of the BET counter is changed. 1 is added (Se20), and the process returns to the step of Se10.

  If the value of the BET counter is a prescribed number in the step of Se19, 1 is added to the value of the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 41c (Se21), and whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50 which is the upper limit value. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the process returns to the step of Se10. If the value of the credit counter is 50, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c (Se23), and the process returns to the step of Se10. .

  In step Se24, it is determined whether an operation of the start switch 7 is detected. If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected in the step of Se24, the process proceeds to the step of Se28, and if the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se25).

  If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number in the step of Se25, the process returns to the step of Se10, and if the value of the BET counter is a specified number, the input impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c and the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off. The state is set, the medal flow path is set as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side, the insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se26), and the setting at the start of the game is performed (Se27). In the setting at the start of the game, detection of operations of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 is invalidated. Then, after the step of Se27, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. Along with this, setting of bets based on the insertion of medals, detection of the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is prohibited, and the adjustment of credits based on the detection of the operation of the adjustment switch 10 is prohibited. It becomes.

  In step Se28, it is determined whether or not an operation of the single BET switch 5 has been detected. If the operation of the single BET switch 5 is not detected in the step of Se28, the process proceeds to the step of Se33, and if the operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (Se29). If the value of the BET counter is a specified number in the step of Se29, the process returns to the step of Se10. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se30). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to step Se10. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se30, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se31), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se32), and the process returns to the step of Se10.

  In step Se33, it is determined whether or not an operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in the step of Se33, the process proceeds to the step of Se38, and if the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se34). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se34, the process returns to the step of Se10. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se35), If the counter value is 0, the process returns to step Se10. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se35, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se36), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se37), and the process returns to the step of Se34.

  In the step of Se38, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Se38, the process returns to the step of Se10. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the operation is based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se39), and if the game is a replay game, the process returns to step Se10. If the game is not a replay game in the step of Se39, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Se40). If the value of the BET counter is 0, the process proceeds to the step of Se36, and the value of the BET counter is 0. Otherwise, a bet amount settlement flag indicating that the already set bet amount is to be settled is set in the RAM 41c (Se41), and the process proceeds to Step Se42. In the step of Se42, the hopper motor 34 is driven to pay out medals corresponding to the value stored in the credit counter or the BET counter, that is, medals stored as credits or medals used for setting the number of bets. Checkout process is performed to control the return. Then, after the settlement process in the step of Se42, the input impossible flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se43), and the process returns to the step of Se10.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd2.

  In the internal lottery process of this embodiment, first, a prescribed number that is a predetermined number of medals inserted according to the game state of the game is read (Sg1), and the process proceeds to step Sg2. The prescribed number is 3 in any gaming state.

  In step Sg2, it is determined whether or not the number of inserted medals, that is, the value of the BET counter matches the specified number read in step Sg1, and if the number of inserted medals matches the specified number, step Sg3 If the number of medals inserted does not match the specified number, the process proceeds to step Sg4.

  In step Sg3, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value stored in the set value work is an appropriate value. If the set value is in the range of 1-6, the process proceeds to step Sg5, and if not, the process proceeds to step Sg4.

  In the step of Sg4, since it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is stored in the register, and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  In step Sg5, random number acquisition processing for acquiring a random number used in the game is performed, and the process proceeds to step Sg6. In the random number acquisition process, a sampling command is output to the sampling circuit 43, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 is latched, and the latched random number value is input from the I / O port 41d and extracted. A predetermined logical operation is performed on the extracted random number, and the result is obtained as a random number.

  In the step of Sg6, the state number (any of 0 to 5) is stored in the RAM 41c according to the game state of the game, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg7. In the step of Sg7, according to the gaming state indicated by the state number and the number of inserted medals (value of the BET counter), the first combination number to be drawn is stored in the RAM 41c, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg8. In the step of Sg7, when the state number is 0-2, that is, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), the first combination number to be drawn Is set to 0 (big bonus (1)) and the state number is either 3 or 4, that is, if any special role is carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (2) 14 (replay (1)) is set as the lot number subject to lottery, and when the state number is 5, that is, in the case of a regular bonus, 16 (red cherry) is initially set as the lot number subject to lottery. To do.

  In the step of Sg8, it is confirmed whether or not the state number is 5, that is, whether or not the regular bonus is being performed. If the state number is 5, that is, if the regular bonus is being performed, the process proceeds to the step of Sg10. . If the state number is not 5, the process proceeds to step Sg9.

  In the step of Sg9, it is confirmed whether or not the role number as the lottery target is 20, that is, whether or not the lottery for all the lottery targets in the gaming state other than the regular bonus has been completed. If YES, go to step Sg11. If not 20, the process proceeds to step Sg10.

  In the step of Sg10, it is confirmed whether or not the role number as a lottery target is 23, that is, whether or not the lottery for all the lottery targets in the regular bonus has been completed. Advances to step Sg11. If not 23, the process proceeds to step Sg12.

  In step Sg11, the general combination storing work in which the general combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step of Sg12, it is checked whether or not the common flag registered in the role-specific table is 1 in association with the processing target number, and if it is 1, the process proceeds to the step of Sg13. Advances to step Sg14.

  In step Sg13, the address of the storage area for the number of determination values in the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table in association with the role number to be processed is read. Then, the number of judgment values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg15.

  In the step of Sg14, first, the setting value stored in the RAM 41c is read, and further, the number of determination values of the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table is associated with the processing target number and the read setting value. Read the address of the area. Then, the number of judgment values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg15.

  In the step of Sg15, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sg13 or Sg14 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of the addition is set as a new random number value. It is determined whether an overflow has occurred when added to the random number value. The occurrence of an overflow indicates that the winning combination corresponding to the processing target winning number has been won. If an overflow occurs, the process proceeds to step Sg18. If no overflow occurs, the process proceeds to step Sg17.

  In step Sg17, 1 is added to the role number to be processed, and the process returns to step Sg8.

  In the step of Sg18, it is confirmed whether or not the combination number is 0 to 13, that is, a combination number indicating a special combination or a combination including a special combination. If the combination number is 0 to 13, the step of Sg19 is performed. If the combination number is not 0 to 13, the process proceeds to step Sg20.

  In the step of Sg19, a special combination winning flag corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set in the special combination storing work in which the special combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c. In the Sg20 step, the general combination storing work of the RAM 41c is set. In addition, the winning flag of the general combination corresponding to the processing target combination number is set, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. Note that, in the step of Sg20, when the combination number is 0-4, the general combination is not won, so in this case, the general combination storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the reel rotation process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd3.

  In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (about 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (Si1), and the wait time must have elapsed. For example, it waits until the wait time elapses.

  If the wait time has elapsed in the Si1 step, a new wait time is set (Si2).

  Next, the setting at the start of the rotation of the reel motor is performed, and the rotation of the reel is started (Si3). Then, a sliding frame number setting process for setting the number of sliding frames of the virtual sliding frame table for each rotating reel is performed (Si4), and a setting at the time of completion of stop preparation is performed (Si5). As a result, the stop operation can be validated, and then the stop operation becomes valid when a constant-speed rotation of the reel is detected in the processing at the time of passing through the origin of a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not an operation of any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R is detected (Si6). If no operation of any stop switch is detected, a reel rotation error (over a certain period of time). Then, it is determined whether or not an error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 (Si7). If no reel rotation error has occurred, an insertion error (medal insertion) is further performed. Whether or not a medal insertion was detected during a period other than the permitted period, and whether or not a payout error (medal payout was detected during a period other than the permitted period) It is determined whether or not an error has occurred (Si8, Si9), and any error occurs in steps Si7 to Si9. If it is not determined, the flow returns to step Si6.

  Further, when it is determined that a loading error has occurred in the Si8 step, or when a dispensing error is determined in the Si9 step, an error code indicating a loading / dispensing error during reel rotation is set in the register (Si10 ), And shifts to the error processing shown in FIG. 33 (Si11). When the error is released, the process returns to the Si6 step again.

  If it is determined in step Si7 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating a reel rotation error is set in the register (Si12), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 33 (Si13). Along with this, the rotation of the reels is also temporarily stopped. When the error is released, the process returns to the Si3 step again and the reel rotation is resumed.

  If any stop switch operation is detected in step Si6, the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) in the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch is calculated. After obtaining and setting the workpiece corresponding to the stop reel (Si14), the process waits until the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation stops (Si15).

  When the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop operation stops, it is determined whether or not all the reels have stopped (Si16). If all the reels have not stopped, the process returns to the Si4 step, and all the reels are If it has stopped, the reel rotation process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, in the reel rotation processing, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected is continued until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Then, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the sliding frame number setting process executed by the CPU 41a in the step of Si4.

  First, in the sliding frame number setting process, it is determined whether or not it is the first stop in the step of Si101, that is, whether or not all the reels are rotating, and if it is the first stop, the process proceeds to the step of Si103. If not, the process proceeds to step Si102.

  In step S102, whether stop control is performed by control based on the result of the internal lottery, that is, the result of the internal lottery is replay (1), replay (2), bell, big bonus (1) to (3 ) + Replay (1), any of big bonuses (1) to (3) + replay (2), big bonus (4), big bonus (5), and control control If the stop control is not performed by the control, the process proceeds to step Si103. If the stop control is performed by the control control, the process proceeds to step Si106.

  In step Si103, the table index is referred to, the stop control table corresponding to the result of the internal lottery and the stop position of the stopped reel is selected, the selected stop control table is expanded, and the number of sliding frames is displayed in the virtual sliding frame table. After performing the stop control table expansion process for storing the process, the process proceeds to step Si104.

  In the step of Si104, whether stop control is performed by table + control control based on the result of internal lottery, that is, the result of internal lottery is any cherry, bell + any cherry, big bonus (1), big Bonus (1) + any cherry, big bonus (2), big bonus (2) + any cherry, big bonus (3), big bonus (3) + any cherry, big bonus (1) ~ It is determined whether or not any of (3) + bell, and when stop control is not performed by table + control control, the sliding frame number setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. When stop control is performed by control, the process proceeds to step Si105.

  In step S105, for each stop operation position, a search is made for a stop position according to the number of sliding frames, and the priority of the searched stop position and the priority of the stopping position based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table If the priority of the searched stop position is higher, after performing the sliding frame number updating process for updating the sliding frame number of the virtual sliding frame table, the sliding frame number setting process is terminated, Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the step of Si106, for each stop operation position, the stop position where the winning combination is aligned on the winning line is searched from the stop positions based on the number of sliding frames of 0 to 4, and the number of sliding frames that become the stop position obtained by the search is virtually slipped. After performing the stop position search process stored in the frame table, the sliding frame number setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the sliding frame number update process executed by the CPU 41a in the step of Si105.

  First, in the sliding frame number update process, a reel to be processed is set in the step of Si201. That is, among the rotating reels, a reel that has not been processed yet is set as a target reel, and the process proceeds to step Si202.

  In the step of Si202, whether or not an abnormal winning occurs when the stop position pointer indicating the stop position to be processed is set to 0 and the process proceeds to the step of Si203 to reach the stop position to be processed. The virtual winning determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step Si204 to determine whether or not the abnormal winning is determined as a result of the virtual winning determination.

  If it is not an abnormal winning in the step of Si204, the process proceeds to the step of Si205, and further prohibition position determination is performed to determine whether or not the stop prohibition position is reached, and the process proceeds to step of Si206. It is determined whether or not.

  If it is not the stop prohibition position in the step of Si206, the process proceeds to the step of Si208, and if it is determined that the abnormal winning is obtained in the step of Si204, or if it is determined that the stop prohibition position is determined in the step of Si206, the step of Si207 Then, after setting a stop prohibition position flag indicating a stop prohibition position corresponding to the stop position indicated by the stop position pointer, the process proceeds to step Si208.

  In the step of Si208, the stop position pointer is advanced by 1 and the process proceeds to the step of Si209 to determine whether or not the stop position pointer is 21. If the stop position pointer is not 22, the process returns to the step of Si203 to stop the stop position pointer. If the pointer is 21, that is, it is determined that the determination for all the area numbers has been completed, the process proceeds to step Si210.

  In the step of Si210, the stop operation position pointer indicating the stop operation position to be processed is set to 0, and the process proceeds to the step of Si211 so that the corresponding reel (reel set as the target reel) in the virtual sliding frame number table is reached. ) To obtain one slip frame number in the order (see FIG. 19A) corresponding to the number of slide frames stored corresponding to the corresponding stop operation position (region number indicated by the stop operation position pointer). It progresses to the step of Si212.

  In step Si212, a stop position based on the number of sliding frames acquired in Si211 is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Si213 to determine whether the acquired stop position is a stop prohibition position, that is, whether a stop prohibition position flag is set. To do.

  If it is determined at the Si 213 step that the stop is prohibited, the process returns to the Si 211 step. If it is determined that the position is not the stop prohibited position, the process proceeds to the Si 214 step.

  In the step of Si214, the sliding symbols stored corresponding to the corresponding stop operation position (area number indicated by the stop operation position pointer) of the corresponding reel (reel set as the target reel) in the virtual sliding frame number table. The priority of the stop position based on the number and the priority of the stop position acquired in the step of Si212 are compared based on the relationship shown in FIG. 19B, and the process proceeds to the step of Si215.

  In the Si215 step, is the priority of the stop position acquired in the Si212 step as the comparison result in the Si214 step higher than the stop position priority based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame number table? If it is not higher than the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame number table (including the case where the priority is the same), the process proceeds to step Si217, and the virtual sliding frame number table If it is higher than the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding frames stored in, the process proceeds to step Si216.

  In the step of Si216, the sliding symbols stored corresponding to the corresponding stop operation position (area number indicated by the stop operation position pointer) of the corresponding reel (reel set as the target reel) in the virtual sliding frame number table. The number is updated to the number of sliding frames at the stop position determined to have higher priority than that, and the process proceeds to step Si218.

  In the step of Si217, it is determined whether or not the stop positions have been compared for all the sliding pieces of 0 to 4, and if the comparison of the stopping positions has been completed for all of the sliding pieces of 0 to 4, the step of Si218 is completed. Proceed to the step, and if the comparison of the stop positions has not been completed for all the sliding frames from 0 to 4, the process returns to the step of Si211.

  In the step of Si218, the stop operation position pointer is advanced by 1 and the process proceeds to the step of Si219 to determine whether or not the stop operation position pointer is 22. If the stop operation position pointer is not 21, the process returns to the step of Si211. If the stop operation position pointer is 21, that is, if it is determined that all the region numbers 0 to 20 have been determined, the process proceeds to step Si220.

  In the step of Si220, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed rotating reel. If there is an unprocessed rotating reel, the process returns to the step of Si201, and if there is no unprocessed rotating reel, the number of sliding frames is updated. To return to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the stop position search process executed by the CPU 41a in the step of Si106.

  First, in the stop position search process, a reel to be processed is set in step Si301. That is, among the rotating reels, a reel that has not yet been processed is set as a target reel, and the process proceeds to step Si302.

  In the step of Si302, a stop position pointer indicating a stop position to be processed is set to 0, and whether or not an abnormal winning occurs when the process proceeds to the step of Si303 and reaches the stop position to be processed. The virtual winning determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step S304 to determine whether the result of the virtual winning determination is an abnormal winning.

  If it is not an abnormal winning in the step of Si304, the process proceeds to the step of Si305, and further prohibition position determination is performed to determine whether or not the stop prohibition position is reached. It is determined whether or not.

  If it is not the stop prohibition position in the step of Si306, the process proceeds to the step of Si308, and if it is determined that the abnormal winning is determined in the step of Si304, or if it is determined that the stop prohibition position is determined in the step of Si306, the step of Si307 is performed. Then, after setting a stop prohibition position flag indicating a stop prohibition position corresponding to the stop position indicated by the stop position pointer, the process proceeds to step S308.

  In the step of Si308, the stop position pointer is advanced by 1 and the process proceeds to the step of Si309 to determine whether or not the stop position pointer is 21, and if the stop position pointer is not 21, the process returns to the step of Si303 to stop. If it is determined that the pointer is 21, that is, the determination for all the area numbers has been completed, the process proceeds to step S310.

  In the step of Si310, the stop operation position pointer indicating the stop operation position to be processed is set to 0, and the process proceeds to the step of Si311 and the order corresponding to the winning combination (bell, big bonus (4), big bonus ( In the case of 5), the number of sliding frames is 4, 0, 3, 1, 2 in the order, replay (1), in the case of replay (2), the number of sliding frames is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 The number of sliding frames is acquired in the order of () and the process proceeds to the step of Si312.

  In step Si312, the stop position based on the number of sliding frames acquired in Si311 is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Si313 to determine whether the acquired stop position is a stop prohibition position, that is, whether a stop prohibition position flag is set. To do.

  If it is determined in the Si 313 step that the position is the stop prohibited position, the process returns to the Si 311 step. If it is determined that the position is not the stop prohibited position, the process proceeds to the Si 314 step.

  In the Si314 step, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is aligned on the winning line when the acquired stop position is reached. If it is determined that the combination is complete, the process proceeds to step Si316.

  In the step of Si315, it is determined whether or not the stop positions are compared for all the sliding frame numbers from 0 to 4, and if the comparison of the stopping positions is completed for all the sliding frame numbers from 0 to 4, the process of Si316 is completed. Proceed to the step, and if the comparison of the stop positions is not completed for all the sliding frames from 0 to 4, the process returns to the Si311 step.

  In the step of Si316, last in the step of Si312 corresponding to the corresponding stop operation position (area number indicated by the stop operation position pointer) of the corresponding reel (reel set as the target reel) in the virtual sliding frame number table. The acquired number of sliding frames at the stop position is stored, and the process proceeds to step Si317. In addition, when the number of sliding symbols that become the stop position acquired last is the stop prohibiting position, the number of sliding symbols that are not the stopping prohibition position among the number of sliding symbols that become the stopping position acquired before that is stored. .

  In the Si317 step, the stop operation position pointer is advanced by 1 and the process proceeds to the Si318 step to determine whether or not the stop operation position pointer is 21, and if the stop operation position pointer is not 21, the process returns to the Si311 step. If the stop operation position pointer is 21, that is, if it is determined that all the region numbers 0 to 20 have been determined, the process proceeds to step Si319.

  In step S319, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed rotating reel. If there is an unprocessed rotating reel, the process returns to step Si301. If there is no unprocessed rotating reel, the number of sliding frames is updated. To return to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the control content of the RT process executed by the CPU 41a in the game end process of Sd6.

  In the RT process, first, it is determined whether or not RT (1) is in the RAM 41c based on whether or not the RT (1) flag is set (Sj1). Proceed to step. If RT (1) is in the step of Sj1, 1 is subtracted from the value of the RT game number counter assigned to the RAM 41c to store the number of remaining RT games (Sj2), and the remaining number of RT games is 0. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the RT game number counter is 0 (Sj3). If the number of remaining RT games is not 0 in step Sj3, the process proceeds to step Sj4, and it is determined whether or not any special role has been won. If any special role has not been won, the process proceeds to step Sj7. . When the number of remaining RT games is 0 in the step Sj3 and when any special combination is won in the step Sj4, the RT (1) flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sj5). The remaining number of RT games is cleared (Sj6), RT (1) is terminated, and the process proceeds to step Sj7.

  In step Sj7, it is determined whether or not RT (2) is in progress based on whether or not the RT (2) flag is set in the RAM 41c. If not in RT (2), the process proceeds to step Sj15. If RT (2) is in step Sj7, the RT game number counter value is decremented by 1 (Sj8), and it is determined whether the remaining RT game number is 0, that is, whether the RT game number counter value is 0. (Sj9). If the number of remaining RT games is not 0 in step Sj9, the process proceeds to step Sj10 to determine whether or not any special role has been won. If any special role has not been won, the process proceeds to step Sj11. . In the step of Sj11, it is determined whether or not any fallen combination has won, and if any fallen combination has won, the process proceeds to the step of Sj12, and if any fallen combination has not won, the step of Sj15 Proceed to In step Sj12, it is determined whether or not any special combination is won. If any special combination is selected, the process proceeds to step Sj15. If the number of remaining RT games is 0 in the step Sj9, if any special combination wins in the step Sj10, any fallen combination wins in the step Sj11, and any in the step Sj12 If the special role is not won, the RT (2) medium flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sj13), the remaining RT game number is cleared (Sj14), and RT (2) is terminated. Proceed to step Sj15.

  In step Sj15, it is determined whether or not replay (2) has won. If replay (2) has not won, the process proceeds to step Sj21. If replay (2) has won, any special It is determined whether or not the winning combination is won (Sj16). If any special combination is won in step Sj16, the process proceeds to step Sj21. If any special combination is not selected, the process proceeds to step Sj17. In step Sj17, it is determined whether or not RT (1) is in progress based on whether or not the RT (1) flag is set in the RAM 41c. If not in RT (1), the process proceeds to step Sj19. If it is (1), the RT (1) flag is cleared (Sj18), and the process proceeds to Sj19. In step Sj19, the RT game number counter is set to 200, the flag in RT (2) is set in the RAM 41c (Sj20), the game state is shifted to RT (2), and then the process proceeds to step Sj21.

  In step Sj21, it is determined whether or not the game is an end game of big bonus (1). If it is not an end game of big bonus (1), the process proceeds to step Sj24, and if it is an end game of big bonus (1), The RT game number counter is set to 50 (Sj22), the RT (1) in-progress flag is set to the RAM 41c (Sj23), the game state is shifted to RT (1), and then the process proceeds to step Sj24.

  In the step of Sj24, it is determined whether or not the big bonus (2) end game, and if it is not the big bonus (2) end game, the RT process is ended and the process returns to the original process, and the big bonus (2) If the game is an end game, the RT game number counter is set to 20 (Sj25), the RT (1) flag is set to the RAM 41c (Sj26), the game state is shifted to RT (1), and the RT process is performed. To return to the original process.

  44 and 45 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 3, that is, interrupting the start process or the game process at intervals of 0.56 ms. .

  In the timer interruption process, first, interruption is prohibited (Sk1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process is prohibited. Then, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Sk2).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sk3). In the step of Sk3, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  Next, referring to the counter value for branching, it is determined whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sk4), and if it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sk8 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sk24 described later is executed (Sk5).

  Next, referring to the counter value for branching, it is determined whether or not it is 1, that is, timer interrupt 2 (Sk6). If it is not timer interrupt 2, that is, timer interrupt 1, the reel motor Reel start processing (Sk7) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step processing (Sk8) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, the motor phase signal standby process (Sk9) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a certain time has been sequentially executed, and then the register saved in the stack area at Sk2 is restored (Sk20). The interrupt prohibited in the step is permitted (Sk21), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

  In the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Sk6, LED dynamic display processing for dynamically lighting various indicators (Sk10), control signal output processing for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to the output port, etc. (Sk11), random number update process for updating various software random numbers (Sk12), time counter update process for updating various time counters (Sk13), command transmission for transmitting commands stored in the command queue to the effect control board 90 After the processing (Sk14) and the external output signal update process (Sk15) for updating the external output signal are sequentially executed, the registers saved in the stack area in Sk2 are restored (Sk20), and the interrupts prohibited in the step of Sk1 are permitted. (Sk21), the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If it is timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 in the step of Sk4, the branch counter value is further referred to to determine whether it is 3 or not, ie, timer interrupt 4 (Sk16). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt 3, port input processing (Sk17) for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port, passing the origin of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R during rotation (reel reference) (Passing position) is detected, the occurrence of a reel rotation error is detected, whether stop preparation is completed (stop preparation completion code is set), stop preparation is complete, and If it is rotating at high speed, the process at the time of passing through the origin (Sk18) that validates the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel, and the various scans based on the detection signals of the various switches. After sequentially executing the switch input determination process (Sk19) for determining whether or not the switch satisfies the detection condition, the register saved in the stack area in Sk2 is restored (Sk20), and the interrupts prohibited in the Sk1 step Is permitted (Sk21) and the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 in the step of Sk16, when the stop operation position is stored in the work of the stop reel with the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R or the automatic stop control, the work of the stop reel The stop position is determined from the stop operation position stored in, and the stop switch process (Sk22) for calculating the number of steps after which the stop should be performed, and the number of steps until the stop calculated in the stop switch process is counted to stop After the stop process (Sk23) for starting the brake by the two-phase excitation when it is time to perform, the final stop process (Sk24) for the three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start of the brake in the stop process is sequentially executed, and then in Sk2. Restore the registers saved in the stack area (Sk20), and enable the interrupts that were prohibited in the Sk1 step ( k21), returns to the interrupt before processing.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the control content of the stop switch process executed by the CPU 41a in the timer interrupt 4 of the timer interrupt process described above.

  In the stop switch process, first, for all reels in the order of left, middle, and right, whether or not a stop operation position is set for the work on the corresponding reel, that is, a stop operation has been detected or stopped by automatic stop. (Sk101, Sk102). If no stop operation has been detected for all reels, or if no stop has been instructed, the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  In addition, if any stop operation of the reel is detected in the step of Sk101 or if the stop of the reel is instructed, the process proceeds to the step of Sk103.

  In the step of Sk103, the virtual sliding frame table corresponding to the reel is referred to, and the region number serving as the stop position is specified from the region number including the step number of the stop operation position set for the work corresponding to the stop reel. Then, the process proceeds to step Sk104, the number of steps required from the current reel reference position to the stop position specified in step Sk103 is calculated, and after setting the calculated number of steps, the stop switch process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 47 shows a power interruption interrupt process (main) executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 2, that is, when a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is inputted, interrupting the execution process or the game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of.

  In the power interruption interruption process (main), first, interruption is prohibited (Sm1). That is, other interrupt processing is prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt processing (main). Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sm2). Note that the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, but are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sm3). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not inputted, the register saved in the stack area in Sm2 is restored (Sm4), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sm1 is permitted (Sm5), and the process before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step Sm3, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sm6), and all output ports are initialized (Sm7). . Next, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sm8), and access to the RAM 41c is performed. It is prohibited (Sm9).

  Then, except for the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sm10, where Sm10 is the same process as Sm3), a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the CPU 41a reliably stops operation when the power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described startup processing is executed, and if the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the original processing is performed. It will return to.

  In this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 41c is prohibited, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process. However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the process proceeds to the start-up processing based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 49. You may make it do.

  Next, the startup process (sub) executed by the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95 to the sub-control unit 91, the CPU 91a performs a startup process (sub) shown in FIG. The reset signal is a signal that is output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the sub-control unit 91 is stagnant. This process is performed at the time of restart due to a malfunction of the control circuit 92.

  In the startup process (sub), the internal device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sr1), the display control circuit 92 is initialized (Sr2), and access to the RAM 91c is permitted (Sr3). . Then, the RAM parity of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Sr4), and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity is 0 (Sr5).

  If the data in the RAM 91c is normal, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is 0 in the step Sr5, the data stored in the RAM 91c is normal, so the process proceeds to the step Sr6. The production state before power interruption is restored. In step Sr6, the control pattern that was last executed before power interruption is set, and then the process proceeds to step Sr7.

  If the RAM parity is not 0 in step Sr5, the data stored in the RAM 91c is not normal. Therefore, the RAM 91c is initialized (Sr15) and the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (Sr16). Proceed to step.

  In step Sr7, it is determined whether or not the restart flag is set in the RAM 91c, that is, whether or not the restart is due to a malfunction of the display control circuit 92. If the restart flag is set, the step of Sr is performed. If the restart flag is not set, that is, if the power-up is activated, the process proceeds to step Sr8, only the command reception interrupt process is permitted, and the process proceeds to step Sr9.

  In step Sr9, it is determined whether an initialization command has been received. If an initialization command has not been received, the process proceeds to step Sr10, in which it is determined whether a power-on command has been received. When the initialization command is received, the RAM 91c is initialized (Sr17), the setting notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Sr18), and the process proceeds to step Sr13.

  In step Sr10, if the power-on command is not received, the process returns to step Sr9 again. If the power-on command is received, the process proceeds to step Sr11.

  In step Sr11, based on the power-on command received in step Sr10, it is determined whether or not a special role is elected in the state before power interruption (Sr15), and the special role is elected in the state before power interruption. If the special role notification pattern for notifying the winning of the special role is set as a control pattern (Sr12), the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reels are set according to the set control pattern. An effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the LED 55 is executed (Sr13), all interruptions are permitted (Sr14), and the process proceeds to a loop process.

  Further, in the step Sr11, when the special role is not elected in the state before the power interruption, the liquid crystal display according to the control pattern set in the step Sr6, that is, the control pattern set before the power interruption. 51, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55 is executed (Sr13), all interruptions are permitted (Sr14), and the process proceeds to a loop process. That is, as the timer interrupt process is permitted at this time, various effects based on the reception of the command can be executed.

  In this embodiment, it is difficult to connect the driving tool by restricting the release of the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the game electronic component. Specifically, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a. And the connection between the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 and the connection between the board-side connector 622g of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g are restricted from being released from each other. The connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a is restricted by the connector restricting member 500a, the connection between the cable-side connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a, and the connection between the board-side connector 622g and the cable-side connector 612g. The release of the connection is regulated by the connector regulating member 650.

  Further, by restricting the release of the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90, it is difficult to release the connection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90. Specifically, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620d of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610d of the cable 600d, the cable side connector 611d of the cable 600d. And the board side connector 621d of the production relay board 80, the board side connector 622p of the production relay board 80 and the cable side connector 612p of the cable 601p, the cable side connector 613p of the cable 601p and the board side of the production control board 90 The connection with the connector 623p is restricted from releasing the connection between these connectors. The connection between the board-side connector 620d and the cable-side connector 610d is restricted by the connector restricting member 500b, the connection between the cable-side connector 611d and the board-side connector 621d, and the connection between the board-side connector 622d and the cable-side connector 612d. Connection and connection between the cable-side connector 613p and the board-side connector 623p are restricted by a connector restricting member (not shown).

  These connector restricting members are configured to be able to restrict the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connectors connected to each other, and the connection release restricting state that makes the release impossible unless the release restricting part related to the connection with the connector is destroyed. As long as it is configured to leave a trace when the connection release restriction state is released, its form is arbitrary and can be variously changed.

  Specifically, for example, it may be a cover body that is formed separately from the board-side connector and the cable-side connector and that can be attached and removed in a connected state to restrict the connector from being removed. Alternatively, it may be a locking portion that is provided on at least one of the board-side connector and the cable-side connector and that cannot be detached from each other when the connectors are connected to each other, or the board-side connector is mounted. In a restricting portion or the like that is provided in a substrate storage case or the like that can store a substrate to be connected, and that forms a connection release restriction state that restricts connector removal when the substrate is stored in the substrate storage case and sealed. It may be an adhesive or the like that bonds the connectors connected to each other.

  Next, the detailed structure of the board case 200 for housing the game control board 40 and the connector restricting members 500a and 500b will be described.

  49 and 50 are exploded perspective views showing the board case 200 and the mounting base 250 for attaching the board case 200 to the housing 1b constituting the main body of the slot machine 1 and the connector restricting members 500a and 500b. FIG. 52 is a perspective view showing a state in which the substrate case 200 is assembled to the mounting base 250, and FIG. 52 is an enlarged perspective view of the main part of the mounting side member 510 and the connector cover 520 constituting the connector regulating members 500a and 500b. 53 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 52, FIGS. 53 (b) and 53 (c) are cross-sectional views taken along line BB in FIG. 52, and FIG. FIG. 55A is a perspective view showing a state where the connector cover is attached to the attachment side member 510, and FIG. 55A is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. Is a D-D sectional view of FIG. 54.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the board case 200 includes a lower case 201 as a case body that covers the back side of the game control board 40, and an upper case 203 that covers the mounting surface side of the game control board 40. And assembled so as to sandwich the game control board 40. The mounting surface of the game control board 40 is connected to electronic elements such as a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, and RAM 41c, and a cable-side connector provided at one end of a cable from another board, although not shown in detail. Many board-side connectors 620a to 620d are mounted.

  The lower case 201 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper surface is opened by a bottom plate 201a formed in a substantially rectangular shape and side walls formed so as to surround the periphery of the bottom plate.

  The two short side walls 201c of the lower case 201 are provided with two sealing pieces 211 and 211 protruding outward, and the other short side wall 201d has two pairs of locking portions. 210 protrudes outward. Further, locking pieces 511 of attachment side members 510 and 510 to be described later engage with both long side ends from the side wall 201c and both long side ends from the side wall 201d on the back surface of the bottom plate 201a of the lower case 201. Engaging grooves 212 are respectively formed.

  The upper case 203 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. It is shaped like a box. The lower surface of the upper case 203 has the same shape as the lower case 201, and a space for accommodating the game control board 40 is formed inside by assembling the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 together.

  On the side wall 203c on one short side of the upper case 203, sealing pieces 231 and 231 are disposed outwardly at locations corresponding to the sealing pieces 211 and 211 provided on the side wall 201c on one short side of the lower case 201, respectively. The four sealing pieces 232 are provided to protrude outwardly at equal intervals between the sealing pieces 231 and 231. The other short side wall 203d of the upper case 203 is engaged with the pair of locking portions 210 at locations corresponding to the two pairs of locking portions 210 provided on the other short side wall of the lower case 201, respectively. Engaging engaging portions 230 are provided. Further, on the other short side wall 203d of the upper case 203, a locking piece 235 that engages with locking holes 251a and 251a of the mounting base 250, which will be described later, at a position outward from the engaging portion 230. 235 is provided.

  In addition, recesses 203e and 203f are formed in the step portions 203a and 203b on both short sides of the upper case 203, respectively, and a game housed in the substrate case 200 is formed on the bottom surface of the recess 203e of the step portion 203a. An insertion hole 234b through which the board-side connector 620d can be inserted is formed at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 620d of the control board 40, and the game control accommodated in the board case 200 is formed on the bottom surface of the recess 203f of the stepped part 203b. An insertion hole 234a through which the board-side connector 620a can be inserted is formed at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the board 40.

  The mounting base 250 is a member for fixing the substrate case 200 to the housing 1 b that forms the main body of the slot machine 1. The mounting base 250 is made of synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the bottom plate 250a formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the bottom plate 201a of the lower case 201, and two of the peripheral edges of the upper plate The side walls 250b and 250c formed on the long edges are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper surface is open. Screw holes 252 are formed at a plurality of locations on the bottom plate 250a of the mounting base 250, and a side wall 250d having a notch 250e at the center is formed on one short side of the bottom plate 250a. Are provided with a pair of guides 254, 254 from the notch 250e of the side wall 250d toward the center. Guide grooves 254a and 254a into which engaging portions 257 and 257 formed at both ends of a fixing member 255 described later are fitted are formed on the opposing surfaces of the guides 254 and 254, respectively.

  The fixing member 255 is made of a synthetic resin, and drooping pieces 255b and 255b extending downward (rearward in the figure) from both ends of the fixing piece 255a having four fixing holes 256 formed on the upper surface, and the drooping piece 255b. The engaging portions 257 and 257 are formed in a substantially U-shape formed in the left and right direction (up and down direction in the drawing) from both ends of the 255b. The fixing member 255 is attached to the attachment base 250 by fitting the locking portions 257 and 257 into the guide grooves 254a and 254a formed in the guides 254 and 254 of the attachment base 250, respectively.

  On the short side of the mounting base 250 on which the side wall 250d is formed, a locking column 253 having an inward locking claw 253a at the tip is provided upright from the bottom plate 250a, and on the opposite short side. Engagement holes 251 and 251 in which engagement holes 251 a and 251 a into which the engagement parts 230 of the upper case 203 are inserted are connected to the bottom plate 250 a are provided upright at both ends.

  49 and 50, the connector restricting member 500a is attached to the board case 200 and the cable side attached to the board side connector 620a and attached to the board side connector 510. A connector cover 520 that covers a part of the connector 610a, and the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200, and the connector cover 520 is attached to the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a. Removal is regulated. The connector restricting member 500b has substantially the same configuration as the connector restricting member 500a, and is attached to the attachment side member 510 attached to the board case 200, the attachment side member 510, and connected to the board side connector 620d. A connector cover 520 that covers a part of the cable-side connector 610d. The cable-side connector from the board-side connector 620d is attached by attaching the attachment-side member 510 to the board case 200 and attaching the connector cover 520. The removal of 610d is restricted.

  The attachment-side member 510 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is formed into a shape that conforms to the surface shape of the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 constituting the substrate case 200, as shown in FIGS. Specifically, the attachment side member 510 is attached to the short side where the engaging portion 230 of the upper case 203 is provided, and the shape thereof is the step portion 203b in the upper case 203 when attached to the board case 200. A cylindrical locking hole portion 513 having a notch 512 for releasing the cable side connector 610a (cable side connector 610d) and a locking hole 513a on the inner side thereof, in contact with the bottom surface of the concave portion 203f (the concave portion 203e of the stepped portion 203a). Upper pieces 510c and 510c that contact upper surfaces of both end portions of the step portion 203b (step portion 203a) in the upper case 203 are extended through standing pieces 510b and 510b that rise from both ends of the base piece 510a formed with The locking portions 257 and 257 extend inward via the side pieces 510d and 510d depending from both ends of the upper pieces 510c and 510c. When mounting on the substrate case 200, the opposing surfaces of the base piece 510a and the upper pieces 510c, 510c of the attachment side member 510 to the substrate case 200 are the upper surfaces of the step portion 203b (step portion 203a) in the upper case 203. And the bottom surface of the recess 203f (the recess 203e).

  On the inner surface of the locking hole 513a in the locking hole 513, as shown in FIG. 52, a locking groove 514 is provided upward from the lower end of the locking hole 513a at a position facing the center. Yes. The locking groove 514 has a substantially L shape including a shallow groove portion 514a having a shallow depth from the lower end of the locking hole 513a and a deep groove portion 514b deeper than the shallow groove portion 514a, and the shallow groove portion 514a of the opposing locking grooves 514 and 514. 514a and deep groove portions 514b and 514b are formed at positions facing each other across the center. That is, the locking grooves 514 and 514 are formed symmetrically with respect to the center.

  The connector cover 520 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, when attached to the attachment side member 510 attached to the board case 200, the board side connector 620a (board side connector 620d). ) Is connected to the cable-side connector 610a (cable-side connector 610d) and is formed in a substantially U-shaped covering section 521, and one side surface 521a of the side surface in the longitudinal direction of the covering section 521 is formed. A locking cylinder 522 having substantially the same diameter as the inner periphery of the locking hole 513a of the locking hole 513 in the attachment side member 510 is provided via the connection piece 522a.

  The lower end of one side surface 521a of the covering portion 521 contacts the upper surface of the base piece 510a when attached to the attachment-side member 510, and ribs 521b and 521b are provided on the back surface of the side surface 521a. The lower surface of 521b is also in contact with the upper surface of the base piece 510a.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the locking cylinder 522 has an outward locking claw 523a formed at the tip at a position facing the center, and engagement portions 523 and 523 that are elastically deformable inward. It has been. The engaging portions 523 and 523 are attached with the engaging claws 523a and 523a in a state where the connector cover 520 is connected to the board side connector 620a (board side connector 620d) and the cable side connector 610a (cable side connector 610d). When attached to the side member 510, it is provided at a position to engage with the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a of the locking grooves 514 and 514 formed in the locking hole 513a.

  Next, the state of attachment of the connector restriction members 500a and 500b to the board case 200 and the state of attachment of the board case 200 to the housing will be described.

  First, the game control board 40 is accommodated in the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 constituting the board case 200 to be in a sealed state. In order to seal the lower case 201 and the upper case 203, the engaging portions 230 of the corresponding upper case 203 are engaged with the two pairs of locking portions 210 of the lower case 201, respectively, One of the sealing pieces 211 of the case 201 and the corresponding sealing piece 231 of the upper case 203 are fixed with a one-way screw.

  As is well known, a one-way screw can be screwed by rotation in one direction, but cannot be rotated even if it is rotated in the other direction, that is, the screw cannot be loosened. It is a screw. For this reason, when one sealing piece 211 of the lower case 201 and the corresponding sealing piece 231 of the upper case 203 are fixed with a one-way screw, either the sealing piece 211 or the sealing piece 231 is broken. Without this, these sticking cannot be released.

  Then, by fixing the sealing piece 211 and the sealing piece 231, the movement of the upper case 203 in the longitudinal direction with respect to the lower case 201 is restricted. The release of the engagement of the joint portion 230 is also restricted, and the upper case 201 and the lower case 203 are integrated with the game control board 40 accommodated therein, and the sealing piece 211 and the sealing piece 231 are broken. Otherwise, it will not be possible to open.

  Next, the attachment side members 510 and 510 constituting the connector restricting members 500a and 500b are attached to the board case 200 in which the game control board 40 is sealed. The attachment-side member 510 is elastically deformed on both side pieces 510d and 510d outward and attached to the step 203b (step 203a) of the upper case 203. Then, by releasing the elastic deformation, the engaging pieces 511 and 511 are attached by engaging with the engaging grooves 212 and 212 on the back surface of the lower case 201. At this time, the base piece 510a and the upper pieces 510c and 510c of the attachment-side member 510 are in contact with the upper surface of the step 203b (step 203a) and the bottom of the recess 203f (depression 203e) of the upper case 203, respectively. The notch 512 provided in the upper case 203 coincides with the insertion hole 234a (insertion hole 234b provided in the recess 203e) provided in the recess 203f of the upper case 203, and these notch 512 and insertion hole 234a (insertion hole 234b). The board-side connector 620a (board-side connector 620d) of the game control board 40 accommodated in the board case 200 is exposed from the inside of the board case 200 to the outside.

  Next, the mounting screw 259 is screwed into the housing side wall through the screw hole 252 of the mounting base 250 to fix the mounting base 250 to the housing, and the locking portions 257 and 257 of the fixing member 255 are fixed. The fixing member 255 is mounted on the mounting base 250 by fitting into the guide grooves 254 a and 254 a of the mounting base 250.

  Next, the board case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is assembled to the attachment base 250. Specifically, after inserting the locking pieces 235 and 235 protruding to one end side of the substrate case 200 into the locking holes 251a and 251a of the locking hole portions 251 and 251 of the mounting base 250, respectively, as shown in FIG. The substrate case 200 is accommodated between the side walls 250b and 250c of the mounting base 250, and the upper surface of the other end side step portion 203a of the substrate case 200 is locked by the locking claw 253a of the locking column 253, thereby fixing the substrate case 200. Temporarily fix to the mounting base 250. In this state, the four sealing pieces 232 provided at one end of the upper case 203 and the fixing holes 256 of the fixing member 255 attached to the mounting base 250 are in corresponding positions, and in this state, any of the sealing pieces The sealing piece 232 and the fixing member 255 are fixed by screwing the aforementioned one-way screw into the corresponding fixing hole 256 from above the H.232.

  Then, by fixing the sealing piece 232 and the fixing member 255, the movement of the end of the substrate case 200 on the sealing piece 232 side in the removal direction from the mounting base 250 is restricted, and the locking post 253 Since the horizontal movement of the substrate case 200 toward the sealing piece 232 side is also restricted, the engagement pieces 235 and 235 protruding to one end of the substrate case 200 cannot be removed from the engagement holes 251a and 251a of the mounting base 250. It becomes possible. Further, in this state, the screw holes 252 of the bottom plate 250a of the mounting base 250 are all covered with the substrate case 200, and access to the mounting screws 259 is impossible, and the mounting base 250 cannot be removed from the housing. Become. In this way, the substrate case 200 to which the attachment-side member 510 is attached is fixed to the housing via the attachment base 250, and the substrate case 200 is attached to the housing unless the sealing piece 232 or the fixing member 255 is broken. It will be in the state which cannot be removed from.

  Further, when the board case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is fixed to the attachment base 250 (housing) so as not to be removed, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the side piece 510d of the attachment side member 510 is provided. 510d abuts against the inner surfaces of the side walls 250b, 250c of the mounting base 250 and is held between them so that deformation of the both side pieces 510d, 510d of the mounting side member 510 outward is restricted. It becomes impossible to remove from 200.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51, with respect to the board side connectors 620a and 620b of the game control board 40 exposed through the insertion holes 234a and 234b of the board case 200 and the notch 512 of the base piece 510a in the attachment side member 510. 54. After connecting the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a and the cable side connector 610d of the cable 600d, respectively, the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a, and the board side connector 620d and the cable side connector 610d are connected. As shown in FIG. 5, the cover portion 521 of the connector cover 520 covers the upper side of the cable side connector 610a and the cable side connector 610d, and the engagement tube 522 of the connector cover 520 is engaged with the engagement hole portion 513 in the attachment side member 510. Fits into the hole 513a Make. As a result, the engaging portions 523 and 523 of the locking cylinder 522 abut against the inner periphery of the locking hole 513a and elastically deform inward. At this time, when the engaging portions 523 and 523 are positioned so as to cover the cable-side connector 610a and the cable-side connector 610d with the covering portion 521, the engaging portions 523 and 523 naturally Positioned in the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a, the locking cylinder 522 is further fitted, and the locking claws 523a and 523a at the tips of the engagement portions 523 and 523 are inserted into the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a of the locking grooves 514 and 514, respectively. By reaching, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), the inward elastic deformation of the engaging portions 523 and 523 is released, and the locking claws 523a and 523a are engaged with the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a, respectively. The upward movement of the locking cylinder 522 is restricted, and the side surface 521a of the covering portion 521, the side surface of the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a, the base The side surfaces of the side connector 620d and the cable side connector 610d come into contact with each other and the rotation of the locking cylinder 522 with respect to the locking hole 513 is restricted, so that the mounting side member 510 and the connector cover 520 are connected and integrated. The connector restricting member 500a thus formed is formed. In this state, since the engaging portions 523 and 523 are covered with the locking hole portion 513, it is impossible to elastically deform the engaging portions 523 and 523 inward from the outside, and the connector cover 520 or the attachment side member Unless 510 is broken, the connector cover 520 cannot be removed from the attachment side member 510.

  Further, when the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 so as not to be removed, a part of the upper surface of the cable side connector 610a and the cable side connector 610d is covered by the covering portion 521 as shown in FIGS. And the movement of the cable side connector 610a and the cable side connector 610d in the pulling direction from the board side connector 620d is restricted, and the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a of the cable side connector 610d The removal from the side connector 620d is regulated.

  In this way, with the attachment side member 510 attached to the board case 200, the board case 200 is fixed to the housing, and then the cable side connector 610a and the cable side connector 610d are connected to the board side connector 620a and the board side connector 620d. In this state, the board-side connector 620a and the board-side connector 620d are attached to the attachment-side member 510 so as to partially cover the board-side connector 620d from above. The board-side connector 620d cannot be removed.

  Next, the situation when the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a and the connection between the cable side connector 610d and the board side connector 620d are released will be described.

  To release the connection between the cable-side connector 610a and the board-side connector 620a and the connection between the cable-side connector 610d and the board-side connector 620d, the attachment-side member 510 or the connector cover 520 is broken and the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment-side member. 510, or the sealing piece 232 or the fixing member 255 of the board case 200 is broken, and the board case 200 is detached from the mounting base 250, and the mounting side member 510 with the connector cover 520 attached is removed. It is necessary to remove from 200.

  For example, when it is necessary to remove the cable-side connector 610a or the cable-side connector 610d from the board-side connector 620a or the board-side connector 620d due to a failure of the cables 600a, 600d, etc., it is removed by the former method, When replacing the entire case 200, the latter method may be removed.

  First, when replacing the cable 600a (cable 600d), when it is necessary to remove the cable-side connector 610a (cable-side connector 610d) from the board-side connector 620a, the connector constituting the connector regulating member 500a (connector regulating member 500b) The method of removing the cover 520 from the attachment-side member 510 will be described. First, the connecting piece 522a that connects the cover portion 521 of the connector cover 520 and the locking cylinder 522 is broken with a tool such as a nipper. As a result, the covering portion 521 is separated and the locking cylinder 522 can be rotated with respect to the locking hole portion 513. In this state, by rotating the locking cylinder 522 counterclockwise when viewed from above, the engaging portions 523 and 523 move from the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a of the locking grooves 514 and 514 to the positions of the deep groove portions 514b and 514b. As shown in FIG. 53 (a), from the state where the locking claws 523a and 523a are engaged with the shallow grooves 514a and 514a, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the locking claws 523a and 523a The shallow groove portions 514a and 514a are disengaged. As a result, the locking cylinder 522 can be moved upward. As shown in FIG. 53C, when the locking cylinder 522 is pulled upward, the locking claws 523a and 523a are engaged with the deep grooves 514b and 514b. However, in this state, since the engaging portions 523 and 523 are exposed, the engaging portions 523 and 523 can be elastically deformed inward, and the engaging claws 523a can be elastically deformed inwardly. 523a and the deep groove portions 514b and 514b are disengaged, and the locking cylinder 522 can be detached from the attachment side member 510, whereby the connector cover 520 is completely separated from the attachment side member 510, and the connector cover 520 Since the restriction of the movement in the pulling direction of the cable side connector 610a (cable side connector 610d) by the cable is also released, the cable side connector 610a (cable side Connector 610d) and it is possible to release the connection between the board-side connector 620a (substrate side connector 620d).

  When the connector cover 520 is detached from the attachment side member 510, the covering portion 521 and the locking cylinder 522 are broken, and once broken, the original state is not restored. The trace which canceled the connection with the side connector 620a (board | substrate side connector 620d) will remain.

  Next, when it is necessary to remove the cable-side connector 610a and the cable-side connector 610d from the board-side connector 620a and the board-side connector 620d when replacing the board case 200, the attachment-side member 510 and the connector cover 520 together with the board case 200 The method of removing from the board will be described. First, the sealing piece 232 of the substrate case 200 fixed to the fixing member 255 with a tool such as a nipper is broken. As a result, the end of the substrate case 200 on the side of the sealing piece 232 can be moved away from the mounting base 250, so that the locking claw 253 a of the locking column 253 and the stepped portion 203 e of the substrate case 200 Release the engagement. Accordingly, the horizontal movement toward the sealing piece 232 is also possible, so that the locking pieces 235 and 235 of the board case 200 are removed from the locking holes 251a and 251a of the mounting base 250. Thereby, the board case 200 is detached from the attachment base 250, and the side pieces 510d and 510d of the attachment side member 510 can be deformed outwardly, without removing the connector cover 520 from the attachment side member 510. The attachment-side member 510 can be removed from the board case 200. With this, the attachment-side member 510 is removed from the board case 200 in a state of being integrated with the connector cover 520, whereby the cable-side connector 610a and the cable by the connector cover 520 are removed. Since the restriction of the movement in the pulling direction of the side connector 610d is also released, the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the cable side connector 610d and the board side connector 620a and the board side connector 620d can be released.

  In order to remove the attachment side member 510 from the substrate case 200 also by this method, the sealing piece 232 of the substrate case 200 fixed to the fixing member 255 needs to be broken. Therefore, there remains a trace that the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a and the connection between the cable side connector 610d and the board side connector 620d are released.

  Further, according to this method, the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200 is broken and remains on the fixing member 255, but the attachment side member 510 can be removed from the board case 200 without removing the connector cover 520 from the attachment side member 510. Therefore, by attaching the attachment side member 510 with the connector cover 520 assembled to the new board case 200 in which the game control board 40 is accommodated for replacement, the cable side connector 610a and the board side in the new board case 200 are attached. The connection side with the connector 620a and the release of the connection between the cable side connector 610d and the board side connector 620d are disabled, and a new fixing member 255 is mounted on the mounting base 250 and the connector cover 520 is assembled. A new board case 200 to which the member 510 is attached is attached. By attaching the fixing member 255 and the sealing piece 232 to the base 250, the attachment side member 510 cannot be removed again, and the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a, the cable When the connection between the side connector 610d and the board side connector 620d is released, the trace can be left. That is, in such a case, the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 can be reused.

  In this embodiment, the engaging pieces 511 and 511 of the attachment side member 510 are elastically deformed outward and engaged with the engaging grooves 514 and 514 formed on the back surface of the substrate case 200. When the attachment side member 510 is attached to the substrate case 200 and the substrate case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is fixed to the attachment base 250 (housing) so as not to be detached, the attachment side member 510 side Since the pieces 510d and 510d abut against the inner surfaces of the side walls 250b and 250c of the mounting base 250 and are held between the pieces, the deformation of the both side pieces 510d and 510d of the mounting side member 510 is restricted outward. For example, a part of the attachment side member is screwed on the back surface of the substrate case 200 or a removable locking pin. And fixing the board case 200 to the housing (mounting base) in a non-removable manner, the screws and locking pins are concealed, and the board case 200 is attached to the housing, The attachment side member may be controlled to be removed from the substrate case 200. After the attachment case is fixed to the housing with the attachment member attached to the substrate case 200, the attachment member is the substrate. Any configuration may be adopted as long as it cannot be removed from the case 200.

  Next, the detailed structure of the connector restricting member 650 will be described.

  56 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 constituting the connector restricting member 650. FIG. 57 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cover member 680 is assembled to the mounting table 660. 58A is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 57, and FIG. 58B is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the connector restricting member 650 includes a mounting table 660 on which the operation unit relay board 110 is mounted, and a cover member 680 that covers the mounting table 660 from above. After accommodating the operation unit relay board 110, the cable side connectors 611a and 612g of the corresponding cables 600a and 601g are connected to the board side connectors 621a and 622g of the operation unit relay board 110, and then the cover member 680 is attached to the case. By attaching to the body 610, removal of the cable side connectors 611a and 612g from the board side connectors 621a and 622g is restricted.

  The mounting table 660 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a larger diameter than the operation unit relay substrate 110. As shown in FIG. 56, board-side connectors 621a, 622a, 622b, 622c, 622d to 622f, and 622g are mounted on the operation unit relay board 110, both side faces on the long side of the mounting table 660, and short boards. The board side connectors 622a, 622b, 622c, and 622d to 622f whose insertion holes open in the horizontal direction with respect to the mounting surface in the operation part relay board 110 when the operation part relay board 110 is placed on one side surface of the side. Each of the locking holes 661 having the locking holes 661b is provided via the connection piece 661a so as to protrude outward, avoiding the portion where the 622g is located. On the inner peripheral surface of the locking hole 661b, a pair of locking claws 661c and 661c facing the center are formed at positions facing each other across the center.

  The cover member 680 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is formed in substantially the same shape as the mounting table 660. On one long side, the cover member 680 is located at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110. A cover portion 681 that bulges toward the front side at a position corresponding to the board-side connectors 622a and 622b of the operation portion relay board 110 on the other long side. Cover portions 689 that bulge toward the front are formed at positions corresponding to 622c, 622g, and 622d to 622f, respectively.

  On the upper surface 681a of the cover part 681, a notch 681b for releasing the cable 600a connected to the board side connector 621a, which is narrower than the long side of the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a, is formed on the outer side surface. Thereby, covering surfaces 681c and 681 are formed on both side ends of the upper surface 681a, respectively.

  The cover portion 688 has notches 682a for releasing the cables 601a and 601b connected to the board side connectors 622a and 622b, and the cover portion 689 has a cable 601c connected to the board side connector 622c. A notch 682b for releasing the cable, a notch 632c for releasing the cable 601g connected to the board side connector 622g, and a notch 682d for releasing the cables 601d to f connected to the board side connectors 622d to f are formed. Has been. In particular, the notch 682c for releasing the cable 601g connected to the board-side connector 622g is formed to be narrower than the length of the long side of the cable 601g. Pieces 683 and 683 are respectively provided.

  Further, on both side surfaces on the long side and one side surface on the short side of the cover member 680, the locking holes are projected so as to protrude outward at positions corresponding to the locking holes 661 of the mounting table 660. A locking cylinder 684 having substantially the same diameter as the inner peripheral surface of 661b is provided via a connection piece 684a. Lock holes 684a are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the lock cylinder 684 at locations corresponding to the pair of lock claws 661c provided on the inner periphery of the lock hole 661b. Can be combined.

  Next, the mounting state of the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 56, the operation unit relay board 110 is mounted on the mounting table 660, and the board-side connectors 621a, 622a, 622b, 622c. , 622d to 622f and 622g are connected to cable side connectors 611a, 612a, 612b, 612c, 612d to 612f and 612g, respectively. After connecting these cable side connectors to the board side connector, the cover member 680 is attached to the mounting table 660.

  Specifically, the locking cylinder 634 of the cover member 680 is fitted into the locking hole 661 b of the corresponding locking hole 661 of the mounting table 660. Then, by pushing the locking cylinder 634 into the locking hole 661b, the locking claw 661c in the locking hole 661b is engaged with the locking hole 684a of the locking cylinder 684. As a result, it becomes impossible to release the engagement between the locking claw 661c and the locking hole 684a from the outside, and as shown in FIG. 57, the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are connected to the locking hole. If the part 661 or the locking cylinder 634 is not broken, it is in a state where it is assembled so that it cannot be removed.

  When the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are assembled, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the upper surfaces of both ends of the cable side connector 611a connected to the board side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 are the cover members. The covering surfaces 681c and 681c of 680 are covered, the movement of the cable-side connector 611a in the pulling direction from the board-side connector 621a is restricted, and the removal of the cable-side connector 611a from the board-side connector 621a is restricted. ing.

  When the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are assembled, the upper surfaces of both ends of the cable side connector 612g connected to the board side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 are attached to the cover member 680 as shown in FIG. Covered with the covering pieces 683 and 683, the movement of the cable-side connector 612g in the pulling direction from the board-side connector 622g is restricted, and the removal of the cable-side connector 612g from the board-side connector 622g is restricted. .

  Next, the situation when the connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a and the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g are released will be described.

  In order to release the connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a and the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g, a connecting piece 684a for connecting the locking cylinder 684 of the cover member 680 with a tool such as a nipper is provided. Break. As a result, the main body of the cover member 680 and the locking cylinder 684 are separated, and the cover member 680 can be removed from the mounting table 660. By removing the cover member 680 from the mounting table 660, the covering surfaces 681c, 681c The restriction on the movement of the cable side connector 611a in the unplugging direction is released, and the restriction on the movement of the cable side connector 612g in the unplugging direction by the covering pieces 683 and 683 is also released, so the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a And the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g can be released.

  When the cover member 680 is removed from the mounting table 660, the main body of the cover member 680 and the locking cylinder 684 are broken. Once the cover member 680 is broken, the original state is not obtained, and the separated locking cylinder 684 is removed from the mounting table 660. Therefore, there remains a trace that the connection between the cable-side connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a and the connection between the cable-side connector 612g and the board-side connector 622g are released. It will be.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a result of the internal lottery, the table-type stop control according to the reel stop timing (first stop, second stop, or third stop) Since stop control by the control method is used in combination, it is not necessary to prepare a stop control table in advance for all the stop timings of the reels as a result of the internal lottery, so that the storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced.

  Internal lottery results are lost, red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role, blue cherry, big bonus (2), big bonus (2) + small role, white cherry, big bonus (3) In the case of big bonus (3) + small combination, stop control by the table method or the table + control method for all stop timings of the first stop, the second stop and the third stop, that is, a stop prepared in advance While the stop control using the control table is performed, if the result of the internal lottery is bell, replay (1), replay (2), big bonus (4), big bonus (5), the first stop Only the table method or the table + control method is used for stop control, and the remaining second and third stops are controlled by the control method. KazuSatoshi is doing a stop control that does not require a stop control table. In other words, when winning the bell, replay (1), replay (2), big bonus (4), big bonus (5), lose or red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role, blue Stop control by the control method for more stop times than when winning the cherry, big bonus (2), big bonus (2) + small role, white cherry, big bonus (3), big bonus (3) + small role Going out, lost or red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role, blue cherry, big bonus (2), big bonus (2) + small role, white cherry, big bonus (3 ), Big Bonus (3) + Small Bonus, Bell, Replay (1), Replay (2), Big Bonus (4), Big Bonus 5) Since the stop control by the table method or the table + control method is performed for the stop time relatively larger than the winning time, the display result derived to the reel can be varied, while the bell, replay (1), replay When (2), Big Bonus (4), Big Bonus (5) are won, Loss or Red Cherry, Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (1) + Small Role, Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2), Big Bonus (2) + small role, white cherry, big bonus (3), big bonus (3) + stop time is controlled by the control method for more stop times than when winning the small role, bell, replay (1), Replay (2), Big Bonus (4), Big Bonus (5) A paid capacity can be significantly reduced. In other words, the display results can be varied according to the nature of the result of the internal lottery, and the storage capacity of the sliding frame number data can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the first stop is always controlled by the table method or the table + control method regardless of the result of the internal lottery. Therefore, the first stop is performed regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The same stop control method can be used, and the display result is not monotonous and necessary even when winning the bell, replay (1), replay (2), big bonus (4), big bonus (5) It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the sliding frame number data.

  In the present embodiment, red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role, blue cherry, big bonus (2), big bonus (2) + small, which may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation. When winning a winning combination, white cherry, big bonus (3), big bonus (3) + small role, stop control tables for all stopping times, that is, more stopping times than when winning a missing role Since the stop control is performed by the table + control method used, the winning combination is won, and the display result when the winning combination is lost can be diversified.

  In particular, because of the winning combination of the big bonuses (1) to (3) that can be expected to win many medals among the roles that cause the loss, the stop control is performed by the table + control method using the stop control table. It is possible to diversify the display results (so-called chance eyes and reach eyes) when these winning big bonuses (1) to (3) are missed. Further, in the present embodiment, stop control by the table method using the stop control table is performed even in the case of a loss in which none of the roles is won in addition to the winning of the big bonuses (1) to (3). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the display result in the case of losing, and as a result, the degree of freedom of design of the display result that can appear even when the big bonuses (1) to (3) are won or not is increased. That is, since the stop position in the case of losing can be limited by the stop control table, it is easy to adjust the stop position and the appearance ratio that are likely to win the big bonuses (1) to (3). .

  In addition, when winning the bell, replay (1), replay (2), big bonus (4), and big bonus (5) that are not missed, the display results when the big bonuses (1) to (3) are missed ( The relationship with the chance eyes) is weak. In other words, when the bell, replay (1), and replay (2) appear, we cannot expect much special role winning, and when the big bonus (4) and big bonus (5) appear, the special role wins. Therefore, it is less necessary to diversify the display results when replay (1), replay (2), big bonus (4), and big bonus (5) are won. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the second stop and the third stop reel are selected at the time of winning a combination that does not cause a miss such as replay (1), replay (2), big bonus (4), big bonus (5). In other words, because the stop control is performed by a control method that does not use the stop control table for a relatively large number of stop timings compared to the winning of the winning role, it is possible to effectively reduce the storage capacity of the stop control table It becomes. That is, the display results can be varied according to the nature of the result of the internal lottery, and the storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, stop control is always performed by the table method or the table + control method for the first stop. That is, in this case, stop control is always performed using the stop control table registered in advance, so that when the special role is won, the stop that does not stop from the stop control table selected when the special role is not won By selecting the stop control table in which the number of sliding frames to be registered is registered and performing the stop control of the first stop, the reach that is established when the display result is derived to the first stop reel (so-called one-certain) It is possible to easily design the control for deriving the eye).

  If the result of the internal lottery is red cherry, bell + red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role, the red cherry and big bonus (1) will have a maximum of 4 frames each. Since the stop control is performed using the common table creation data (1) in which the stop control table drawn into the winning line in the range is defined, the result of the internal lottery is red cherry, bell + red cherry, big bonus (1), big Bonus (1) + Display result derived in the case of a small role can be designed more easily than when the reel stop control is performed by the control method, and red cherry, bell + red cherry, big bonus (1) , Big Bonus (1) + Small Bonus won each time the reel is stopped according to the lottery result without preparing the data for table creation individually Since it is possible to perform control to, reel 2L, 2C, while diversify display result of 2R, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the table creation data.

  In this embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is blue cherry, bell + blue cherry, big bonus (2), big bonus (2) + small role, white cherry, bell + white cherry, big bonus (3 ), Even in the case of big bonus (3) + small role, stop using common table creation data (2) and common table creation data (3), which are the same as common table creation data (1) In these cases, the same effects as described above are obtained. In the following, the effects related to stop control in the case where the result of the internal lottery is red cherry, bell + red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role will be described, and blue cherry, bell + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2), Big Bonus (2) + Stop Control for Case of Small Bonus, White Cherry, Bell + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3), Big Bonus (3) + Small Bonus Since the same configuration is adopted in the stop control for the case, the stop control for the case of blue cherry, bell + blue cherry, big bonus (2), big bonus (2) + small role, white cherry, bell The effect relating to the stop control in the case of + white cherry, big bonus (3), big bonus (3) + small combination is omitted.

  When the result of the internal lottery is red cherry, bell + red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role, the number of sliding frames based on the common table creation data (1) is the stop operation position. For each stop operation position that stores the number of sliding tops that cannot be avoided for winning combinations other than the winning combination (abnormal winnings) or overlapping winnings after being stored in the virtual sliding top table every time, the stop prohibited position Since the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained and the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained, it becomes a stop position other than the stop prohibited position according to the result of the internal lottery. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position, the display result is the same, so even if only the red cherry is won and missed, the big bonus (1) is won and removed. Since the rate of crucible and the same display result and if is derived is high, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the big bonus (1) is elected.

  In particular, in this embodiment, as the number of sliding frames in the common table creation data (1), the stop operation position where the constituent symbols of the red cherry and the big bonus (1) cannot be drawn is a case of losing that occupies most of the usual cases. Since the number of sliding frames that stop chance chances that do not appear is determined in the case where no role is won, by performing the control as described above, the chance eyes are derived, The player's expectation that the big bonus (1) is won can be more effectively increased.

  Also, in this embodiment, a common table is created for the red cherries that win the prize and the special role that is advantageous to the player, such as a big bonus (1), only by stopping “Red Cherry” on the winning line of the left reel. Application data (1) is applied. In other words, if “Red 7” or “Red Cherry” does not stop on the winning line on the left reel at the time of winning the red cherry, the big bonus (1) is won as the number of sliding frames for the middle and right reels. The same number of sliding frames will be applied. In addition, even if “Red 7” stops on the winning line of the left reel at the time of winning the red cherry, the stop operation position where the big bonus (1) will be missed is the number of sliding frames of the middle reel and the right reel. As in the case where the big bonus (1) is won, the same number of sliding frames is applied. For this reason, if the cherry is won and missed, the same stop position will be stopped at a higher rate than when the big bonus (1) is missed, so the big bonus (1) is won. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for being more effective.

  In this embodiment, only the “red cherry” is stopped on the winning line of the left reel, and a common table is created for the red cherry to be won and a special role advantageous to the player such as a big bonus (1). Data (1) is applied, but common table creation data for the winning combination and the special combination depending on the combination of the display results of any two reels or all reels. In this case, data for creating a common table is applied to a combination with a lot of missing items (a combination in which the corresponding symbol is placed beyond the pullable range) and a special combination. Even in this case, the same stop position will be stopped at a higher rate when the special role is missed due to an increase in the proportion of missed specials. The player's expectation can be more effectively enhanced for.

  In this example, since the red cherry can be won at the same time as the special role, even if the red cherry wins and the red cherry wins and the chance is not derived, the special role Therefore, even in such a case, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the special role has been won.

  In this embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role, all reels are stopped (first stop, first bonus) Since the stop control table based on the common table creation data (1) is applied at 2 stop and 3rd stop), the result of the internal lottery is red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + It is possible to easily design a display mode derived in the case of a small combination, in particular, a display mode of chances derived only when these combinations are won.

  In this embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is red cherry, bell + red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role, The stop control table based on the common table creation data (1) is applied at the time of one stop, the second stop, and the third stop. At least the reel that stops first, that is, the first stop Even if the number of sliding frames based on the common table creation data is applied to the stop reel, the same effect as described above can be obtained. In other words, it is possible to easily design the appearance of the outcome that stops first, that is, the appearance that the player pays the most attention to.

  Further, in this embodiment, different stop control tables are applied when the big bonus (1) is won and when the player loses. For example, the first stop is performed both when the big bonus (1) is won and when the player loses. Common stop control table, that is, stop control table of common table creation data (1) even when it is lost only at the first stop (however, in this case, red cherry will win the left reel. May be used to perform stop control. In this way, when the display result is stopped on the first stop reel, the big bonus (1) is won from the stop position. Since it is not possible to determine whether or not the player is playing, the player's expectation can be maintained thereafter. Further, as described above, since the red cherry is won in the left reel, when the left reel is in the first stop, even if it is lost, the left reel is controlled by performing the stop control by the table + control method. Even if it becomes the 1st stop, it can prevent that red cherry won.

  In this embodiment, when stop control is performed by the table method, before the stop operation becomes effective, that is, before the stop operation is detected, the number of slide pieces registered in the stop control table is expanded to obtain a virtual slide piece. When the stop operation is detected, the virtual sliding piece table is referred to and the number of sliding pieces at the corresponding stopping operation position is acquired and the stop control is performed. Since it is not necessary to expand the stop control table and acquire the number of sliding frames after detection, it is possible to quickly perform control to stop the reel after the stop operation is detected. The time lag until the reel stops can be shortened as much as possible.

  Also, when stopping control is performed using the control method, before the stop operation becomes effective, the stop position corresponding to the winning combination is searched for each stop operation position, and the number of sliding frames based on the search result is virtually slipped. It is stored in the frame table, and when a stop operation is detected, the virtual slide frame table is referred to obtain the number of sliding frames at the corresponding stop operation position and stop control is performed. Since it is not necessary to search for a stop position according to the winning combination after the detection of the stop, it is possible to quickly control the reel after the stop operation is detected. The time lag until stopping can be shortened as much as possible.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when stop control is performed by the table + control method, the number of sliding symbols registered in the stop control table is expanded and stored in the virtual sliding top table before the stop operation becomes effective. In addition, the stop position is acquired for each number of sliding frames, the number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table is updated based on the priority with the acquired stop position, and when the stop operation is detected, Referring to the sliding piece table, the number of sliding pieces at the corresponding stop operation position is acquired and the stop control is performed. After the stop operation is detected, the stop control table is expanded to obtain the number of sliding pieces. Since there is no need to compare the priority or priority, update the number of sliding frames, etc., it is possible to quickly control the reel to stop after the stop operation is detected. After detection, the reel can be as short as possible a time lag until it stops.

  In the present embodiment, the stop control method, the table method and the stop control table to be referred to when performing the stop control by the table + control method, the search order of the stop position when performing the stop control by the control method, the table + control method A control pattern for performing reel stop control, such as the order of determination of priority of stop position when performing stop control, is uniquely determined for the result of the internal lottery while all reels are rotating, These control patterns are uniquely selected according to the result of the internal lottery, and the stop control of the reels is performed according to the selected control pattern, and when any reel has already stopped, the internal lottery As a result, a control pattern uniquely defined for the stop position of the stopped reel is selected, and according to the selected control pattern If the reel stop status (and the stopped position of the stopped reel (display result)) are all the same as a result of the internal lottery, the same control is performed. Since reel stop control is performed based on the control pattern, one control table is selected from a plurality of control tables with respect to one internal lottery result as in the prior art (for example, reel) There is no need for further selection by control distribution lottery or the like, and the control when stopping the reels is not complicated.

  In this embodiment, when any of the reels is already stopped, the reels are determined according to the internal lottery result, the reel stop status and the stop position of the stopped reel. Stop control is performed, but when any reel is already stopped, the internal lottery result, the reel stop status, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. The reel stop control may be performed according to the control pattern, and in this way, the internal lottery result is the same, and the stopped position (stop symbol) of the stopped reel is the same. However, if the stop operation position of the stopped reels is different, different table creation data may be applied, so the display results of the reels are more diverse. It can be.

  In this case, the stop operation position of the reel that has been stopped is determined in a unit of a range where the 1/2 symbols change, that is, a unit less than the range where one symbol changes, and is uniquely determined for the stop operation position. Preferably, the reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern, that is, it is possible to select different control patterns for different number of steps within a range where one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps where a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if the stop position of the stopped reel is the same, and the timing at which the stop operation is performed is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, the control pattern applied to other reels is changed. Therefore, the display results of each reel can be further diversified.

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, the reel stop control is performed according to a control pattern uniquely determined with respect to the internal lottery result, the reel stop status, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. For example, in the case where no combination is won (losing), the same display result is obtained when a stop operation is performed within the range of the area number where the same stop position is determined on a specific reel. However, only when a stop operation is performed in the area of a specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, the display result that constitutes the chance pattern as the control pattern of the other reel is displayed. Select table creation data that can be derived, and stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is defined. If it, it is preferable to select the control pattern capable of deriving the display results that constitute a chance eyes as the control pattern for the other reel. As a result, even if the stop position of the reel at the time when the specific reel is stopped is the same, the stop operation position is different so that the chance is finally controlled so that it can be derived, and the control cannot be derived Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display result of the reels from becoming monotonous when none of the roles is won (losing).

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, the reel stop control is performed according to a control pattern uniquely determined with respect to the internal lottery result, the reel stop status, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. In each case, each time the reels stop, whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel Are preferably transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, so that the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 can detect only the stop position of the reel when the reel is stopped. Instead, it is possible to perform different effects depending on the stop operation position.

  In particular, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the same display is displayed when a stop operation is performed within the range of the area number where the same stop position is determined on a specific reel. The result is derived, but only when the stop operation is performed in the area of the specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, the display result that configures the chance pattern as the control pattern of the other reels As a control pattern for other reels, when a control pattern that can be derived is selected and a stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, When you select a control pattern that can be used to derive the display results that make up the chance, and you have won one of the special roles in the normal gaming state, Among the area numbers for which one stop position is determined, the display result that configures the chance pattern as the control pattern of other reels for more area numbers than when no combination is won in the normal gaming state When a control pattern that can be derived is selected, when the reel stop command is received, if the stop operation position satisfies the chance derivation condition, that is, the display result that constitutes the chance sight can be derived. If the control pattern is a stop operation position that is selected, a special role is won at a higher rate than if it is another stop operation position that does not satisfy the chance derivation condition but has the same stop position. Special effects (for example, unusual stop sounds, etc.) may be given to notify the possibility of the operation being performed. Since the special effect is performed at the time of stopping, there is a higher possibility that the chance chance is finally derived than when the special effect is not performed when the specific reel is stopped. It is possible to effectively raise the player's expectation for the derivation of the chance and the winning of the special role.

  In this embodiment, during the regular bonus, when a small role other than the bell wins, the bell is always won at the same time, and the control that draws the combination of the bells with the most payouts into the winning line is given priority. If any small combination is won during the bonus, the bell can be always won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. In other words, even if a role with a smaller number of payouts such as red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries is elected than the bell in the regular bonus, more medals will be awarded than when the bell wins and red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries win. Since red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries have been won, the number of medals that can be earned during the regular bonus will not decrease.

  In this embodiment, the bell with the largest number of payouts in the regular bonus is simultaneously selected when a small role smaller than the number of payouts of the bells is won. Is not the most paid out small part, but if the largest number of medals are awarded during a regular bonus by stopping on multiple winning lines, such a small part will be paid out more than that. You may make it win at the same time as a small role with few.

  Also, in this embodiment, the bell which is the small payout with the largest payout number in all gaming states is simultaneously won when the small role with a smaller payout number is won in the regular bonus. If at least a small role with the highest number of payouts is selected at the same time when a small number with a smaller number of payouts is elected at the same time during the regular bonus, The number of medals that can be earned in a regular bonus is reduced. It does not have to be a small role with a large number of payouts.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the end of the big bonus (1) (2), it is controlled so that the winning probability of the replay (2) that triggers the transition to RT (2) is increased to RT (1). Thus, the player's expectation to shift to RT (2) can be enhanced by being controlled by RT (1).

  In RT (2), the payout rate of medals per game is higher than that of RT (1), the number of predetermined games as the end condition is larger than RT (1), and more medals than RT (1). Therefore, by controlling to RT (1), it is possible to further increase the player's expectation to shift to RT (2).

  Also, RT (1) and RT (2) both have an expected increase rate of medals per game exceeding 1, and an increase in medals can be expected only by being controlled by RT (1). By shifting to 2), further increase in medals can be expected.

  In addition, RT (2) will be special if any special role is won after the start of RT (2) and before the specified number of games is reached, if the selected special role does not win. RT (2) will not end with the winning of and if the selected special combination is not awarded, it will be possible to continue control to RT (2) until the specified number of games is reached. Even if a special role is won in 2), if the selected special role is not won, RT (2) can be consumed until the specified number of games is reached, giving the player a sense of loss. There is no end.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the special role is carried over after the next game until the special role is won, after the RT (2) reaches the specified number of games, the special role won during that time is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the special role at the end of RT (2).

  In addition, RT (2) ends when RT (2) starts, but before the specified number of games is reached, when a fallen combination (any cherry) wins, RT (2) After the start of the game, even if the falling combination is won, the player performs a stop operation at a timing outside the pulling-in range of the combination of falling combination, that is, the technical intervention of the player Since RT (2) can be continued by this, the interest associated with RT (2) can be enhanced. At this time, the operating procedure for avoiding winnings varies depending on the type of fallen combination, and there is no common avoidance procedure for all types of fallen combinations. Thus, it is determined whether or not RT (2) continues depending on whether or not it is hit, and the interest associated with RT (2) can be further enhanced.

  In addition, the red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry that are fallen roles are 3 or less (3) medals that are the number of medals required to set the maximum bet number (3) that can be set for one game. Since the winning is accompanied by payout of the slot machine 1, not only the player will not suffer a great disadvantage even if the fallen role is avoided, but the winning probability of red cherry, blue cherry and white cherry is the payout rate of the slot machine 1 Will not be greatly affected.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out with the winning of one (1) to (3) is one necessary for setting the minimum number of bets for one game. It is possible to hardly influence the payout rate of the slot machine 1.

  In this embodiment, three medals, which are the number of medals necessary for setting the maximum bet number (3) that can be set for one game, are associated with winning of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry. Although it is designed to be paid out to the player, it is preferable that the number is less, and the number of bets required for setting the number of bets in the minimum unit is two or more, and the payout rate of the slot machine 1 is more affected. Can be difficult to give.

  Also, if any special role is won in RT (2), even if one of the cherries wins, if one of the cherries wins if the selected special role is not won, Since RT (2) will not end until the specified number of games is reached, during this period, if any cherry wins, the winning cherries will be awarded to win the special role. Since more medals can be earned compared to, the number of medals that can be earned afterwards when compared to when not winning, if any special role is won during RT (2) Can be increased.

  In addition, red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry that fall are roles that can be won at the same time as special roles, so even if you win any cherries after the start of RT (2), Since there is a possibility that the special role has been won, even in such a case, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the special role. Furthermore, if the special role is won at the same time, RT (2) will not end even if any cherry wins, and RT (2) will continue until the specified number of games is reached. Despite the winning of the cherry, the RT (2) continues, so that the winning of the special role can be indirectly notified.

  In this embodiment, in the state where no special combination is won in RT (2), when any of the cherries wins, if the number of falling combination notifications remains, the type of the selected cherries Since the falling role type notification is executed, the player can recognize the type of the winning cherry by the notified color when the falling role type notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to know the operation procedure for avoiding the winning of a cherry that may have been won, it is possible to continue RT (2), and the number of games that RT (2) continues is increased by the number of falling combination notifications. Since it can be varied, the interest associated with RT (2) can be further enhanced. In addition, the player does not always have to practice an operation procedure for avoiding a winning combination of a falling combination in RT (2), and an operating procedure for avoiding a winning combination of a falling combination is performed only when the falling combination type notification is executed. Since it only has to be performed, the burden on the player in RT (2) can be reduced.

  In addition, whether or not to give the number of falling combination notifications, that is, when any kind of cherries out of a plurality of types of cherries is won in the state where no special combination is won during RT (2) The big bonus (1) (2) is performed during the big bonus (1) (2) and the result is notified during the big bonus (1) (2). It is possible to enhance the inside interest.

  In addition, a lottery-notification lottery is executed at the opportunity corresponding to the BB effect mode selected by the player, and the probability corresponding to the BB effect mode is also applied as the winning probability at that time. The timing for determining whether or not to give the number of falls notifications depending on the BB performance mode and the expectation at that timing change, so that the player is actively participating in the game. be able to. Furthermore, since the notification that the winning combination for lottery winning combination has been won is also made at an opportunity corresponding to the BB effect mode, the timing of the falling combination notification lottery and the notification timing thereof can be associated with each other.

  In addition, when winning the falling combination notification lottery, a notification number lottery is performed in which one of a plurality of different numbers is selected as the falling combination notification number, and the winning combination won in the notification number lottery Depending on the number of notifications, the number of times the fallen role type notification is executed when any cherry wins in the state where no special combination is won in RT (2), and as a result, RT (2) Since the number of games that can be expected to continue will also change, the interest associated with RT (2) can be further enhanced.

  The falling role notification lottery is performed for the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2), and the big bonus (1) has a larger number of prescribed games of RT (1) to which the transition is made later, and is relatively Since the ratio of selecting a large number of falling combination notifications (3 times, 4 times) is high, the big bonus (1) can be expected to acquire more medals than the big bonus (2).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of continuing games of RT (1) thereafter and the number of times the falling role type notification is executed in RT (2) vary depending on the type of special role. Depending on the type, the increase or decrease of medals can be sharpened.

  In this embodiment, not only during the big bonuses (1) and (2), but also at RT (1) and RT (2), the falling combination notification lottery is executed at the time of a loss. (1) Since the number of falling combination notifications can be given even during (2), when the number of falling combination notifications disappears during RT (2), or during the big bonus (1) (2) Even if the number of times cannot be obtained, RT (2) can be expected to continue.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the remaining number of games in RT (2) is 3, if the winning of special role is not informed at that time, it continues for 3 games until the end of RT (2). An effect is always executed to notify whether or not a special role is won in the final game of RT (2) or the next game of the final game, and at the end of RT (2), that is, special Since the continuous performance is executed at the timing when the winning of the winning combination is most expected, and notification of whether or not the special winning combination is won is performed, it is possible to effectively enhance the player's expectation for the winning of the special winning combination.

  In addition, when no winning combination is won in RT (2), that is, whether or not a continuous effect is executed in response to a loss that has a low appearance frequency in RT (2) and is likely to win a special role A continuous production lottery is performed to determine whether or not a continuous production lottery is won. When winning, the winning pattern is determined by the continuous effect lottery, the continuous effect based on the determined winning pattern is executed, and the winning of the special role is notified, so that the background of the display screen in the RT (2) effect The background selection lottery is selected to change the background of the display screen in the RT (2) effect to the background selected in the background selection lottery, and the background of the RT (2) effect in RT (2) It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the winning of the special role by reduction, it is possible to increase the interest associated with the RT (2) production effectively.

  Also, in the background selection lottery, the evening and night are selected at a higher rate when the big bonus (2) is won than when the big bonus (3) is won, and the big bonus (1) is selected. When winning, the evening and night are selected at a higher rate. For this reason, when the background is changed to evening or night, it is possible to expect the winning of the big bonus (1) which is more advantageous for the player. On the other hand, even when the big bonus (1) is won, the day is selected for 50% and the background may not be changed. Therefore, even if the background does not change, it can be expected that the big bonus (1) will be won. It has become.

  As described above, in the background selection lottery, the background is selected with a probability corresponding to the type of the special role won, and the type of the special role won according to the method of changing the background of the RT (2) effect is selected. Since it becomes possible to suggest, the interest accompanying RT (2) production can be improved more effectively.

  In this embodiment, the production mode (background) of the RT (2) production is changed on the border of the continuous production triggered by a loss that may have been won for the special role. You may make it change a production | presentation aspect on the boundary of the change production | presentation which shows the possibility that a production | presentation aspect will change. When winning a prize, it is preferable to execute a change effect triggered by the chance that the chance of winning the special role is derived, and in this way, the special role may be won Since the change effect is executed only when a characteristic event occurs, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for winning the special role by the change effect. Note that the same effect as described above can be obtained even if a change effect is executed when no winning combination is won.

  In addition, on the condition that the special role is elected during RT (2), an event that is unlikely to win the special role is triggered by an event that is unlikely to be won by the special role or that event alone. In order to change the RT (2) effect effect mode by performing the continuous effect or the aforementioned change effect, or to change the RT (2) effect effect mode without any continuous effect or change effect. Anyway, by doing so, it is possible to make the winning notification of the special role surprising.

  Also, in this embodiment, the RT (2) production direction changes on condition that the special role is won, but the special role is when the special role is won. The production mode of the RT (2) production may change with a higher probability than when it has not been won, and in this way, even if the production mode changes, the winning of the special role will not be confirmed. Interest can be maintained until RT (2) is completed.

  In the present embodiment, the replay notification effect indicating that either the replay or the special role is won is executed as the one-time effect described above in the normal gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2), and RT When replay (1) is won during (1) and RT (2), the replay notification effect is executed with a lower probability than when replay (1) is won in the normal gaming state. Therefore, even if the probability of replay (1) is increased by moving to RT (1) and RT (2), the frequency of replay notification effects will not be extremely increased along with that, and appropriate effects will be achieved. Balance can be maintained.

  In this embodiment, the replay notification effect is executed also at RT (1) and RT (2), but the replay notification effect is not executed at least at RT (1) and RT (2). Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, when the big bonus (4) or the big bonus (5) is won, the effect indicating the big bonus is not performed as when the big bonuses (1) to (3) are won. Until the end of the notification period after the transition to Big Bonus (4) or Big Bonus (5), the Big Bonus (4) or Big Bonus will be continued until the end of the notification period. (5) has been announced, and in fact, the big bonus (4) or big bonus (5) has been won and the game has already shifted to the big bonus (4) or big bonus (5). Even if you have a big bonus (4) or big bonus (5) suddenly, not related to winning, It is possible to impart surprising to trick users, it is possible to increase the interest caused by the transition to a big bonus (4) or big bonus (5) effectively.

  In addition, the combination of the big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5) is smaller than a conspicuous symbol such as “7”, and the number arranged on each reel is “bell” and “replay”. It is composed of two or more kinds of symbols, and it is difficult to understand that it is aligned with the winning line. For the roles other than the big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5), the reels 2L, 2C, Control is made so that the winning lines L1 to L4 are set across the symbols located on the straight line of 2R, while the big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5) are the upper stage in all reels. -The stop position is different between the middle and lower stages, and it is aligned with the winning lines L5 and L6 set across the symbols that are not on a straight line. Since it becomes more difficult to understand that the combination of S (4) and Big Bonus (5) is aligned with the winning line, it becomes difficult to determine that Big Bonus (4) or Big Bonus (5) has won, It is possible to impress that the big bonus (4) or big bonus (5) has suddenly started.

  In addition, the transition to the regular bonus at the same time as the transition to the big bonus (4) or the big bonus (5) greatly increases the probability of winning the bell, so when shifting to the big bonus (4) or the big bonus (5) Can be made to recognize that the bonus announcement production has been executed after the sign state (announcement period) that Bell frequently wins, so that he won the prize on his own with the frequent winning of Bell Even in this case, the player's expectation can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the small role is elected alone in a state other than the notification period and when the special role is not elected, the first small role notification effect is executed at a higher rate than the second small role notification effect. On the other hand, when the small role is elected in the notification period, the second small role notification effect is executed at a higher rate than the first small role notification effect, and in the notification period, the notification period The second small role notification effect that is executed in a state where the special role is not elected in a state other than the above is executed at a high frequency, and accompanied by the second small role notification effect. It is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation during the notification period.

  The big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5) have different payout numbers as end conditions, that is, the amount of medals that can be acquired during the big bonus, and as described above, the big bonus (4) and the big bonus ( Even if the combination of 5) is aligned on the winning line, it is difficult for the player to understand. After the bonus notification, the same first bonus is applied to both the big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5) in the first bonus presentation period. Since the bonus effect is executed, it is difficult to determine whether or not the big bonus continues after the first bonus effect is completed, and the expectation that the big bonus will continue in the next game is difficult. Can be effectively increased.

  Also, if the big bonus continues, there is a possibility that the continuation notification will be made at multiple timings during the period until the end of the next game. The game can be given, and the interest can be effectively enhanced, and the expectation that the game is continued until the game is finished can be maintained.

  In this embodiment, in a state where the game sound effect is continuously output by the continuous effect or the bonus effect, when a certain time (30 seconds) elapses without the game progressing operation after the game ends, Control (silence control) is performed to lower the game sound effect that is being output at the volume (MAX), but the credit is adjusted even after a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the game ended. In some cases, the control for lowering the game sound effect being output at normal volume (MAX) is performed without waiting for the elapse of a certain time (silence control), and before a certain time (30 seconds) elapses after the game ends. Even if a bet amount is set and a certain amount of time has elapsed since the end of the game, when the bet amount is settled and a standby command is sent, the normal volume (MAX ) Control to lower the game effect sound that is being output (silence control) is performed, and the player's willingness even before a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the previous game Since the volume of the continuous game sound effect can be lowered by this, even if the game is interrupted, the surrounding players are not disturbed.

  In addition, in the state where the game sound effect is continuously output by the continuous effect or the bonus effect, even if the predetermined time has passed after the game ends, if the bet number is set, the game sound effect is displayed. The control to mute is not performed, the player is willing to start the game, and the game sound effect is muted even though it must immediately return to the original volume There is nothing.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotor 32a is rapidly braked by the two-phase excitation stop control by using the two-phase excitation stop control together with the two-phase excitation stop control. While being guided to the target stop angle position, and then obtaining a brake by exciting two brake phases at opposite positions across the stop phase of the target stop angle position by three-phase excitation stop control, Since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the rotating rotor 32a can be stopped at the target stop angle position without vibrating. Furthermore, since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a is specified, so that the reel can be smoothly rotated at the start of rotation.

  Further, in this embodiment, when only the setting key switch 37 is turned on to start the setting change mode, the RAM 41c is initialized, but the stationary phase work is not initialized. Even in the gaming state after the setting change, data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R stored in the stop phase work is maintained. Therefore, even when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are rotated for the first time after the setting is changed, it is possible to specify these stop phases, and even in such a situation, the reels can be smoothly started to rotate. It is possible to prevent the reel from vibrating when the reel is rotated for the first time after the setting is changed, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  In addition, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both activated, the RAM 41c including the stop phase work can be initialized by shifting to the setting change mode. It is possible to prevent illegal programs and the like from staying resident by using the stop phase work assigned to store the excitation phase of the motor.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the game is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected. When it is determined that the tank is full, the progress of the game is disabled, and the full tank error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed.

  Also, in the next replay game in which the re-game player wins, the insertion of medals is not permitted until the game is over, so the insertion of medals is not detected effectively and It is not possible to determine whether or not a full tank error has occurred, and it is possible to efficiently monitor the full tank state without wastefully determining whether or not a full tank error has occurred. In addition, since the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible, it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and to reduce the labor for the store clerk to eliminate the full tank state.

  In addition, since the full tank state is determined when the insertion of the medal is detected, in a replay game in which the insertion of the medal is prohibited, it is inevitably determined whether or not the state is full. In performing the control without determining whether or not the replay game is full in the replay game, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the game is a replay game.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, whether or not a full error has occurred at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected in a state where the medals of the next game can be inserted, that is, at the timing when medals stored in the overflow tank 35 increase Since the determination is performed, the full tank state can be determined at an efficient timing.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, when the insertion of the second medal or the third medal is detected in a state where the medal of the next game can be inserted, the bet number is set using credits. In some cases, an insufficient amount of bets may be set by inserting medals. In such a case, the game is determined to be full in the game even though the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 has increased. In this embodiment, after the game control is completed, the full tank state is detected at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected in the state where the medal of the next game can be inserted. Therefore, in a game in which the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 increases, it becomes possible to reliably detect a full tank state.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the bet amount is set using the credit, and the game is started when the medal is not inserted and the game is started. In the game where no medal is inserted and the amount stored in the overflow tank 35 does not increase, it is useless to determine whether or not a full tank error has occurred. It is possible to monitor the full tank condition efficiently without reducing the control load for determining the full tank condition and to reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. It becomes possible to reduce the labor for the store clerk to solve the full tank state.

  In addition, since the full state is determined when the insertion of a medal is detected, the number of bets is set using credits, and it is inevitable when the game starts without a medal being inserted. In the case where the game is started without a medal being inserted, the determination as to whether or not the tank is full is made. In performing the control not to be performed, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the credit is used.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. It is controlled to a full tank error state before the next game medal can be inserted. For this reason, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated once in a state where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating by being controlled to a full tank error state from the start of the game to the end of the control of the game. The rotation state is stopped, and the full tank error state is controlled. Thereafter, when the full tank error state is canceled, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated again, or the hopper motor 34b is driven to perform the medal payout operation. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as stopping the medal payout operation once in a state of being in a state, controlling to a full tank error state, and then restarting the medal payout operation when the full tank error state is canceled. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. It is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set. If the full tank flag is set, the full tank error state may be controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, even when the full tank state is determined after the game control is completed and the full tank flag is set, if the re-gamer has won a prize in the previous game and the next game is a replay game, the game is full. Since it is not controlled by the tan error state, the frequency of full tan errors can be further reduced, so that it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and reduce the labor for the store clerk to resolve the full tank state. It becomes.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the switch input determination process performed every 2.24 ms in the timer interrupt process, the detection signal output from the full tank sensor 35a only changes from the last off state to the on state, and a full error occurs. Therefore, it is not necessary to measure the duration time after changing from off to on, and the control related to the detection of the full tank error can be simplified.

  Further, in this embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the tank is full is made at the timing when the insertion of the medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, but whether or not the tank is full at least once per game. For example, as shown in the modification, after completion of the game control, it is determined whether or not the full game state is reached at the timing before the next game medal can be inserted. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the game is full when the game start operation is detected or when the game control ends. When determining whether or not the game is full at the end of the game control, if the re-gamer wins a prize in the game and the next game is a replay game, it is determined whether or not the game is full. Do not do it.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, before the medal of the next game can be inserted, it is determined whether or not the game is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game. When it is determined that the tank is full, the progress of the game is disabled, and a full tank error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed.

  Also, before determining whether or not the tank is full, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game, and if it is a replay game, it is not determined whether or not it is full. The determination of whether or not a full tank error has occurred is not wasted, the full tank condition can be monitored efficiently, the control load for determining the full tank condition can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and to reduce the labor for the store clerk to solve the full state.

  Further, in the modified example, when the number of bets is set using credits and the game is started without inserting medals, it is determined that whether the game is full or not is not determined after the game control is finished. In the case where no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not a full tank error has occurred is not performed wastefully, and the full tank state can be efficiently obtained. The monitoring load can be reduced, and the control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible, making the player feel bothersome and the effort required for the store clerk to clear the full tank status. Can be reduced.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. After the game is over, the overflow tank 35 is determined. A full tank state can be determined before the number of medals increases. When the full tank state is determined, a full tank error state is set before the next game medal can be inserted, so that the progress of the game is disabled before the medal increases in the overflow tank 35, The amount of storage in the overflow tank 35 will not increase any more, and the full tank error state is controlled between the start of the game and the end of the control of the game, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, When the 2R is rotating, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped once and controlled to a full tank error state, and then the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are restarted when the full tank error state is released. Or when the medal payout operation is stopped by driving the hopper motor 34b, the medal payout operation is once stopped, and a full tank error state occurs. Controlling, when it is released subsequently fully Tan'era state, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such or to resume dispensing operation of medals. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated. In addition, since the determination of the full tank state and the accompanying control of the full tank error state are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  In this embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. Even if it is determined whether or not, the full tank state can be determined at the stage after the game is over and before medals increase in the overflow tank 35.

  Also, in this case, when a full tank state is determined, the full tank error state may be controlled before proceeding to the next game. In this case, the game control is once interrupted and then the game It is not necessary to perform control such as resuming control of the game, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated. In addition, since the determination of the full tank state and the accompanying control of the full tank error state are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  In the present embodiment, an external output signal output from the game control board 40 is output to the hall device. These external output signals include a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a dispensing error signal, but these door opening signal, setting changing signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal are signals that are frequently output. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an external output terminal for each of these signals.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 is output to the hall device via the external output board 1000, and among these external output signals, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, The input error signal and the payout error signal are converted into security signals, which are serial signals that can be individually identified, by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000 and output to the outside. Thus, it is possible to output the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal from one terminal, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary.

  In addition, even if there is a spare signal line that is not currently used but may be used in the future, individual signals can be identified with a single terminal, including the signal output from the spare signal line. It is possible to output as much as possible, and a spare signal line terminal that is not used does not become an empty terminal.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable 600a. The connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 and the connection between the board side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612g of the cable 601g are released. The connector restricting member 500a and the connector restricting member 650 are restricted. As a result, one of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is replaced with a connector such as an illegal driving tool and connected to the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 for illegal actions relating to the progress of the game. For example, it is difficult to conduct illegal activities such as inputting / outputting various signals. For example, it is effective to conduct illegal sales such as providing a slot machine with a bonus winning condition by connecting a driving tool etc. Can be prevented.

  Further, in order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200, the connection piece 522a of the connector cover 520, and the connection piece 684a of the cover member 680 are broken. As a result, when even one connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the trace remains and it is extremely difficult to erase the trace. , The illegal business can be more effectively suppressed.

  In this embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are disconnected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and by doing so, one of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is replaced with a connector such as an unauthorized driving instrument, and the game control board 40 is connected. Since it becomes difficult to perform an illegal act such as causing the main control unit 41 to input / output an illegal signal related to the progress of the game, it is possible to effectively prevent the unauthorized operation.

  Further, in this embodiment, the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 35 that input signals to the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game and the progress of the game. Of the second electronic components 32L, 32C, 32R, 34 for which signals are output from the game control board 40 in response to this, a connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40. The release of connection between connectors is regulated. That is, the inserted medal sensor 31 which cannot advance the game without the signal (the bet number cannot be set and the game cannot be started unless the signal from the inserted medal sensor 31 is input) and the game control. The connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection with the board 40 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors, and the connection between the connectors is released between the other electronic components and the game control board 40 to drive the instrument. Even if it is replaced with a connector, it will be impossible to automatically advance the game automatically, so that it is possible to prevent fraud with the minimum restrictions, and to disconnect these connectors The number of parts can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, only the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is provided with a connector restricting member to restrict the connection between the connectors, but the start switch 7 and the game control board 40 are not connected. The same effect can be obtained even if a connector restricting member is provided only for connector connection between the connector and the release of the connection between the connectors is restricted. Further, if the reel is not configured to stop until the reel stop operation is performed after the start of the reel rotation as in the present embodiment, between the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40. The same effect can be obtained even if the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of signal lines that connect the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components that perform input / output of signals necessary for the progress of the game are connected to the game control board 40, the operation unit relay board 110, and the like. Since the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a, that is, the release of the connection of only one connector connection is restricted. It is possible to restrict the release of the connection between the plurality of signal lines, and it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of the connector connection, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  Even when a plurality of signal lines that connect the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components that perform input / output of signals necessary for the progress of the game are connected via a plurality of cables, the board-side connector is connected. A plurality of parts are prepared for restricting the release of these connector connections by restricting the release of the connection between the plurality of board-side connectors and the plurality of cable-side connectors with a single part, as well as being arranged in close proximity. There is no need, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the connection between the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a connecting the game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 and the board side connector 621a of the operation part relay board 110 is released, and the operation unit relay board 110 is connected. Since the release of the connection between the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g that connects the inserted medal sensor 31 and the board-side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 is simultaneously restricted by one connector restriction member 650, a plurality of these There is no need to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of the connector connection, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the board side connector 620a of the game control board accommodated in the board case 200 and the cable side are attached by attaching the connector regulating member 500a including the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 to the board case 200. The connector 610 a is restricted from being removed, and in this state, the board case 200 is attached to the attachment base 250 and the fixing member 255 and the sealing piece 232 are fixed to each other, whereby the connector restriction member 500 a is removed from the board case 200. Therefore, the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200 is broken to release the fixation between the board case 200 and the housing (mounting base 250), or the mounting side member 510 or the connector cover 520 is mounted. If not released, the board side connector 620a to the cable side connector 61 A state that can not be pulled out of a. That is, the cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed without leaving a trace that the sealing piece 232 is broken or the connection piece 522a is broken, and an unauthorized instrument such as a driving instrument can be connected without leaving a trace. Since it becomes impossible to do so, it becomes possible to surely detect that there is a possibility of fraud.

  Further, when the game control board 40 is replaced together with the board case 200 containing the game control board 40 due to a failure or the like, the sealing piece 232 is broken to fix the board case 200 and the housing (mounting base 250). If released, the connector regulating member 500a can be removed from the board case 200 and the cable side connector 610a can be removed from the board side connector 620a. Therefore, the connector regulating member 500a can be destroyed or the board case 200 can be destroyed. The cable-side connector 610a can be separated from the board-side connector 620a without opening.

  Further, the connector regulating member 500a is composed of the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520, and after the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200, the cable side connector 610a is connected to the board side connector 620a, and the board is in that state. The cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed from the board-side connector 620a by being attached to the attachment-side member 510 so as to cover a part of the cable-side connector 620a from above. Is connected to the board-side connector 620a, and then the locking cylinder 522 of the connector cover 520 is fitted into the locking hole 513a of the locking hole 513 of the attachment-side member 510 located around the board-side connector 620a. The connector cover 52 is simply attached to the attachment side member 510. Part of the cable-side connector 610a is covered and the movement of the cable-side connector 610a in the unplugging direction is restricted, so that the assembly work can be reduced in restricting the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a. it can.

  Further, even when the game control board 40 is housed in the board case 200, it is only necessary to connect the cable side connector 610a to the board side connector 620a as it is, and then attach the connector cover 520. In this case, the assembly work can be more effectively reduced when the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a is restricted.

  Further, the connector cover 520 does not cover the entire connection portion between the cable-side connector 610a and the board-side connector 620a, but covers only a part of the cable-side connector 610a in the pulling direction side. Not only can the removal of the connector 610a with respect to the board-side connector 620a be surely restricted, but the amount of material required for manufacturing the connector cover 520 can be reduced.

  Further, since the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 with only one locking cylinder 522, the structure of the connector cover 520 and the attachment side member 510 can be simplified. A plurality of stop cylinders 522 may be provided, and a locking hole 513a may be provided at a corresponding location on the attachment side member 510, and the connector cover 520 may be attached to the attachment side member 510 at a plurality of locations. By doing so, the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a can be more firmly regulated. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable that the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 at a plurality of locations across the connection portion between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a. The removal and removal of the side connector 610a with respect to the board side connector 620a can be more firmly regulated.

  In addition, the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 with only one locking cylinder 522, but a rib that contacts the surface of the base piece 510a of the attachment side member 510 is provided on one side wall of the connector cover 520. Since 521b and 521b are formed and the movement of the connector cover 520 is restricted, the removal of the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a can be reliably restricted.

  Further, inwardly extending locking pieces 511 and 511 are formed at both ends extending from the base piece 510a of the attachment side member 510, and the locking pieces 511 and 511 are elastically deformed outward. In this state, the attachment side member 510 is attached to the substrate case 200 by being assembled to the substrate case 200 and engaging with the locking grooves 514 and 514 formed on the back surface of the substrate case 200. Since the regulating member 500a can be attached to the board case 200 without using other members such as screws and pins, the number of components can be reduced.

  Further, when the attachment side member 510 constituting the connector restricting member 500 a is attached to the board case 200, the opposing surfaces of the attachment side member 510 of the base piece 510 a, the upper pieces 510 c, 510 c to the board case 200 are the steps in the upper case 203. The upper surface of the portion 203b and the bottom surface of the concave portion 203f are in contact with each other, so that it is possible to effectively prevent unauthorized parts and the like from being attached between the connector restricting member 500a and the surface of the board case 200.

  Further, since both the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 constituting the connector restricting member 500a are made of a transparent synthetic resin material, the visibility in the board case 200 may be impaired by the connector restricting member 500a. Therefore, there is no problem in monitoring the game control board 40. Further, even if an unauthorized part is attached to the gap between the connector restricting member 500a and the board case 200, it can be easily found.

  In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the state before power interruption is restored, and when the special role is elected before power interruption, the CPU 41a transmits a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected. When the sub-control unit 91 receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, the sub-control unit 91 executes a notification effect indicating that the special role is won, and until the notification effect receives a prize determination command indicating that the special role is won. In other words, it is continuously executed until the winning special role is won.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 produces the effect even if the backup is normal until it receives a power-on command or an initialization command indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized as will be described later. Without returning to the state, even if another command is received, the production is not controlled accordingly. For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 can Since the initialization command is not received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission line of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 is disconnected at the time of activation, the power-on command is issued on the sub control unit 91 side. It is impossible to avoid the reception of the special role and to avoid the execution of the announcement effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and from before the power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is always notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power). With the above configuration, the connector is forcibly released. Even if the special tool is won by using a driving tool, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role is won when the main control unit 41 is restarted. In addition, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state in which a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop or the like.

  In addition, the notice effect is continuously executed until a winning judgment command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won, so that the special role is won, that is, the winning flag of the special role is set. The notification effect will not stop until it is cleared, and it will not be possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role election by the amusement store. Unauthorized sales such as providing the slot machine 1 set to "" to a player at the start of business at a game shop can be further effectively prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and when the special role is elected before the power interruption, the CPU 41a indicates a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected. , And the sub-control unit 91 receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, so that the sub-control unit 91 controls the notice display effect indicating that the special role is won, the effect effect LED 52, This is executed by a production device such as the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Even if the special role is won illegally, when the main control unit 41 is restarted, the special role is won. The slot machine is set in a state where the special role is won using a driving tool and is provided to the player at the start of the game shop operation. Do It said was an illegal business can be more reliably prevented.

  In this embodiment, the release of the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 is restricted by the connector restricting member. After the main control unit 41 is activated, the effect control board By connecting 90, it becomes difficult to craft such as not to notify the special role, so that illegal sales by an amusement store can be prevented more reliably. Further, the connector restricting member is configured to be able to restrict the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector connected to each other, and the connection release restriction that makes the release impossible unless the release restricting part related to the connection with the connector is destroyed. When the state is formed and the connection release restriction state is released, the trace remains so that the release restriction part must be destroyed in order to release the connection between the connectors. Since it is extremely difficult to form the connection release restriction state again after releasing the connection, and it takes time and effort, it is possible to more effectively prevent the fraud.

  In the present embodiment, the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 is monitored during a power failure, and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 is monitored. Is released, the game control board 40 has a disconnection monitoring IC 50 that stores a disconnection flag indicating that, and the CPU 41a requests the disconnection monitoring IC 50 to check the disconnection flag at the time of activation. When the disconnection flag is stored based on the reply from the accompanying disconnection monitoring IC 50 and the disconnection flag is stored, that is, the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 is released. In such a case, it is determined that the disconnection is abnormal, and an error state due to the disconnection abnormality error is controlled to disable the progress of the game, and the CPU 41a is used in the RAM 41c area. Since all the areas except for the above area are initialized and cannot be restored to the original state, after the main control unit 41 is activated, the special control board 90 is connected so that the special role is not notified. In this case, since the RAM 41c is initialized and cannot be restored to the original state, illegal sales by the amusement store can be prevented more reliably.

  In this embodiment, the special device winning is notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. However, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and When the special role is elected before the power interruption, the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the payout display 13 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 may notify the special role. good. In addition, a notification LED for notifying the winning of the special role is provided as an electronic component that is directly controlled by the main control unit 41. When the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is selected before the power interruption. In this case, the notification LED may be used to notify the winning of the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the electronic control component (inserted medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 as the game progresses. The use of unauthorized devices is also prevented by restricting the release of connections between the connectors, but when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is elected before the power interruption. In this case, it is possible to prevent the use of a driving tool regardless of whether or not a structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is used, so that the structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is not used. By doing so, it is not necessary to change the structure of parts in order to regulate the insertion and removal of connectors, and maintainability in the event of a failure, etc. It can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 also monitors the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 at the time of a power failure, and the electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. When the general connection state is released, the disconnection flag indicating that is stored, and the CPU 41a requests the disconnection monitoring IC 50 to confirm the disconnection flag at the time of activation, and the disconnection monitoring IC 50 receives a request for the disconnection flag. When the disconnection flag is stored based on the reply and the disconnection flag is stored, that is, when the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the disconnection abnormality occurs. Control of the error state due to the disconnection abnormality error to disable the progress of the game and the CPU 41a in the area of the RAM 41c uses it. All regions except the region in the initializing, becomes impossible return to the original state.

  On the other hand, in order to connect an unauthorized device such as a driving device, it is necessary to insert and remove the connector. Since the disconnection flag is stored in the disconnection monitoring IC 50 and the CPU 41a is activated, all the areas of the RAM 41c other than the area in use by the CPU 41a are initialized. It is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state in which a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of a game shop business.

  Further, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 monitors the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 even when energized, and the electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. When the state is released, the disconnection flag indicating that is stored, and the CPU 41a periodically checks the storage state of the disconnection flag in the timer interruption process even after the activation, and the disconnection flag is stored. In such a case, it is determined that the disconnection is abnormal, and an error state due to the disconnection abnormality error is controlled to disable the progress of the game, and all areas of the RAM 41c other than the area being used by the CPU 41a are initialized, Since it is impossible to return to the original state, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 can be used even when the connection of the connector is released to replace it with a normal connector without turning off the power. The disconnection flag is stored, and accordingly, an error state due to disconnection abnormality is controlled, and all areas of the RAM 41c other than the area in use by the CPU 41a are initialized. It is possible to more surely prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state where a winning combination is won to a player at the start of a game shop business.

  Also, in this embodiment, once controlled to an error state due to a disconnection abnormality error, the game progresses unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. The disabled state is not released. That is, not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine with the initialization of the RAM 41c, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, the setting change operation is an employee of a game shop) Therefore, it is ensured that the game is played based on the setting value selected by the amusement shop side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, when the CPU 41a determines that the disconnection is abnormal and controls the error state due to the disconnection abnormality error, all the areas of the RAM 41c other than the area in use by the CPU 41a are initialized. Although the configuration is such that the original state cannot be restored, the RAM 41c is not initialized in the error state due to the disconnection abnormality error, but after that, the RAM 41c is initialized (in this embodiment, the setting change mode is entered). A transition operation corresponds to this, but separately from this, an initialization switch for initializing the RAM 41c by being detected when the power is turned on may be provided, and the initialization operation of the RAM 41c by the initialization switch may be applied. ), The error state may be canceled and the game can be made possible. Even if the special device is illegally set using a special instrument, the disconnection flag is stored in the disconnection monitoring IC 50 and the CPU 41a is activated by releasing the connection of the connector in order to replace it with a regular connector. At this time, since the RAM 41c is initialized and the progress of the game is disabled until the RAM 41c is initialized, the slot machine set in the state where the special role is won using the driving tool is changed to the amusement store. It is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing to a player at the start of business.

  Further, in this embodiment, the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the electronic control component (inserted medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 as the game progresses. The use of unauthorized devices is also prevented by restricting the release of the connection between the connectors, but the state of electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is monitored, and the game control board When the electrical connection state between 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, a disconnection flag indicating the fact is stored, and the CPU 41a confirms the storage state of the disconnection flag at the start and after the start. If the disconnection flag is stored, it is determined that the disconnection is abnormal, and the error state due to the disconnection abnormality error is controlled to disable the progress of the game. Initialize all the areas of the M41c area except for the areas that are being used by the CPU 41a, or disable the progress of the game until the RAM 41c is initialized by performing an initialization operation, so that the connectors can be inserted and removed. Regardless of whether or not the structure is restricted, it is possible to prevent the use of a driving tool, so it is possible not to have a structure that restricts the insertion and removal of connectors. In addition to requiring a significant structural change in the parts to regulate, it is possible to improve maintainability in the event of a failure.

  In this embodiment, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 monitors the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, but signals necessary for the progress of the game are input and output. Electronic components (for example, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, etc. in a configuration that does not stop the reel until the reel stop operation is performed after the start of reel rotation as in this embodiment). Even if it does, the effect similar to the above is acquired.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 has an electrical connection between the game control board 40 and an electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 as the game progresses. And the game control board 40 between the electronic component (the input medal sensor 31) and the game control board 40 that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game. When the disconnection is determined, the RAM 41c is initialized to prevent unauthorized sales by the game store. As shown in FIG. 73, the backup power source of the main control unit 41 is connected to the game control board 40. To the game control board 40 and the operation part relay board 110, the operation part relay board 110, the operation part relay board 110 and the inserted medal. Via the cable 601g for wiring connection of the sensor 31 and further turned back by the inserted medal sensor 31, and returned to the game control board 40 again via the cable 601g, the operation part relay board 110, and the cable 600a, and the main control part 41 The connector may be connected between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 while the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off. Is released even at one location, the backup power supply line is disconnected, the data in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 cannot be retained, and is lost. In other words, when even one connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the backup data held in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is lost. On the other hand, in order to connect an unauthorized device such as a driving device, it is necessary to insert / remove the connector, but even if a special device is selected by using the driving device, the connector must be replaced with a regular connector. Since the data in the RAM 41c is initialized by releasing the connection, the slot machine set in a state in which the special role is won using the driving tool is provided to the player at the start of the operation of the game shop. It is possible to prevent such illegal sales.

  Note that when the backup power is returned from the game control board 40 to the game control board 40 via the inserted medal sensor 31 and supplied to the main control unit 41, the connector connection therebetween is released. Although the data in the RAM 41c is lost, an electronic component (for example, the start switch 7 or the reel after the reel starts rotating as in the present embodiment) that inputs and outputs signals necessary for the progress of the game. The same effect as described above can be obtained even if the operation is performed via stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc., which are not configured to stop the reel until the stop operation is performed.

  Capacitors and batteries that store backup power are mounted on electronic component mounting boards and relay boards (operation unit relay board 110, etc.) for these electronic parts, which are required to input and output signals necessary for the progress of the game. A backup power supply line from a capacitor or a battery mounted on the mounting board or the relay board is connected to the game control board through a cable together with a signal line of the electronic component and supplied to the main control unit 41. Even in this case, since the data in the RAM 41c is lost when the connector connection between the mounting board or the relay board and the game control board 40 is released, the same effect as described above is obtained. In addition, the game control board 40 can be backed up via a cable from a capacitor or battery mounted on the mounting board or relay board. Therefore, in order to continue supplying the backup power to the main control unit 41 when the cable is disconnected, it is necessary to short-circuit the backup power supply line across the boards. Since it becomes very difficult to release the connector connection in a state in which the backup power supply is continuously supplied, the connection of the driving tool can be effectively prevented.

  In this embodiment, when the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 does not input the V blank interrupt signal from the graphic controller 1200 for a certain period, the CPU 91a completes the instruction corresponding to the instruction even though it is instructed to the graphic controller 1200. When the interrupt signal is not input for a certain period, the interruption interruption process (sub) for backing up the production state is executed, and the control state backed up in the interruption interruption process is restored by restarting. Then, with the restart of the CPU 91a, the graphic controller 1200 is initialized, and the operation of the graphic controller 1200 is resumed by executing again an instruction based on the control pattern executed before the restart to the graphic controller 1200. It is supposed to let you. Thereby, even if the graphic controller 1200 hangs up, it can be restored to the state before the hang-up. In addition, the display operation that has been halfway due to the hang-up can be resumed after recovery, and more appropriate recovery from an abnormal display state becomes possible.

  In this embodiment, the power interruption interrupt process (sub) executed at the time of power interruption is used as a process for restoring the control state at the time of restart, and the graphic controller 1200 is hung up. Therefore, it is not necessary to execute a dedicated process, so that it is possible to appropriately recover from an abnormal display state while preventing an increase in program capacity and a complicated process.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the display control circuit 92 hangs up, a restart flag is set in the RAM 91c before the power interruption interrupt process (sub) is executed, and the CPU 91a that is started up thereafter sets the restart flag. By determining the presence / absence, it is possible to distinguish whether the display control circuit 92 is restarted due to power-on or the display control circuit 92 is restarted. If it is determined that it is an activation, and if it is possible to return to the effect state before the restart, it is possible to return to the effect state before the restart without waiting for the reception of the initialization command or the power-on command. For this reason, although the CPU 91a is not activated by turning on the power but restarted by the hang-up of the display control circuit 92, the initialization command and the power-on command cannot be received, and the production is not performed. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a transmits a command corresponding to the progress of the game to the effect control board 90, and the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 receives the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Since the CPU 41a does not need to control the production only by transmitting a command, the processing load on the CPU 41a can be reduced and the production can be varied. .

  Further, a command transmission line for transmitting a command from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is connected between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 via the effect relay board 80, and the game control board Since the production control board 90 is not directly connected to 40, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the command transmission line to the CPU 41a from the outside and affecting the control of the game.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  In the above embodiment, when stop control is performed by the table + control method, the number of sliding symbols developed from the stop control table is stored in the virtual sliding symbol table, the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding symbols, and the sliding symbol. The priority of the stop position acquired by number is compared, and when the priority of the stop position acquired by the number of slide frames is higher, the number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table is updated, When the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding frames developed from the stop control table is compared with the priority of the stopping position acquired for each number of sliding frames, and the priority of the stopping position acquired for each number of sliding frames is higher The number of sliding frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. In other cases, the number of sliding frames developed from the stop control table may be stored in the virtual sliding frame table. .

  In the above-described embodiment, when determining the priority of the stop position, the priority is determined based on whether or not it is a stop-prohibited position and the type of combination that is aligned on the winning line, but the winning combination is aligned with which winning line. For example, in the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols is registered so that the winning combination is aligned with the lower winning line L2, and the winning combination is determined. If it is possible to align, the priority of the stop position where the winning combination is aligned with the rising winning line L4 is increased, and if the winning combination is possible, the lower winning line L2 is also displayed. The winning combination can also be arranged on the winning line L4 that rises to the right, but if it is missed (that is, if the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the number of sliding frames is not updated by the priority determination), the winning combination is Constitute Pattern may only stops on the winning line L2, it is possible to limit the stopping position of the symbol constructing the winning combination. For this reason, by using a stop control table capable of appearing stop positions restricted only when the special combination is won, it is possible to stop the reach that cannot appear if the winning combination is missed.

  In the above embodiment, the stop operation is effective for the process of expanding the number of sliding symbols registered in the stop control table, the process of acquiring the stop position for each number of sliding frames, the process of comparing the priority of the stop position, and the like. The number of sliding frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table in advance, and when a stop operation is detected, the virtual sliding frame table is referenced to obtain the number of sliding frames at the corresponding stop operation position. However, the virtual sliding piece table is not provided, and when the stopping operation is performed, the above processing is performed to acquire the number of sliding pieces corresponding to the timing of the stopping operation. Anyway.

  In the above embodiment, the number of sliding frames is applied as the derived information. However, it is sufficient that the stop position can be specified at least. It may be applied.

  In the embodiment, the stop control is performed by either the table method or the table + control method at least for the first stop regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The stop control may be performed by a control method for the stop time.

  Further, in the embodiment, depending on the result of the internal lottery, stop control by the table method or the table + control method is performed for all stop timings of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop, or only the first stop is performed. Stop control is performed by the table method or the table + control method, and the remaining second stop and the third stop are performed by the control method. However, the table method or the stop method is used for any two stop times. Stop control by the table + control method may be performed, and stop control by the table method or the table + control method may be performed for the remaining one stop time.

  In the above embodiment, RT (1) (2) that can be expected to increase medals is applied, but it may not be possible to directly expect an increase in medals, and an increase in medals cannot be expected directly. However, there is some value (for example, a lottery opportunity such as a gaming state in which an increase in medals can be expected (notified gaming state (so-called AT) in which the type of winning combination is informed) or a high probability state of the lottery opportunity). It may be one that can be expected to indirectly increase medals by being awarded.

  In the above embodiment, the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 1 even in RT (1), but the expected increase rate of medals per game is 1 or less in RT (1), or Since the value of RT (2) can be relatively increased by doing in this way, the player's move to RT (2) is controlled by RT (1). Expectation can be further enhanced.

  In the above embodiment, when any special role is won after RT (1) starts, when Replay (2) wins and moves to RT (2), no special role is won, When Replay (2) reaches the specified number of games without winning a prize, RT (1) is terminated, but when any special role is won, Replay (2) wins and RT When shifting to (2), when a falling combination wins, no special combination is won, replay (2), when no falling combination wins the specified number of games RT (1) May be terminated, or when RT (1) is not provided with a specified number of games and RT (1) has started and one of the special roles is won, Replay (2) wins and RT End RT (1) when transitioning to (2) or when a faller wins a prize It may be allowed to.

  In the above embodiment, the transition to RT (1) is made after the end of the big bonuses (1) and (2). However, other triggers, for example, the transition to RT (1) after the end of the big bonus (3) are made. You may make it transfer, and you may make it transfer to RT (1) when the combination of the combination of RT (1) different from the transfer combination of RT (2) has been prepared.

  In the above embodiment, if any special combination wins after the start of RT (2) but before reaching the specified number of games, RT (2) is not terminated and any special combination wins. RT (2) is ended when any cherry, that is, when a falling role wins, or when the specified number of games is reached without winning a special role or a falling role. (2) The specified number of games may not be provided, and after RT (2) starts, RT (2) may be ended when any special combination wins or when a falling combination wins. In addition, after RT (2) is started without any falling combination, RT (2) is ended when any special combination wins or when the specified number of games is reached without winning any special combination You may make it let it.

  In the above embodiment, in the state where any special role is elected, RT (2) is not terminated even if a fallen role wins during RT (2). Regardless of whether or not is won, if RT falls (2), the RT (2) may be terminated if a winning combination is won.

  In the above embodiment, when a special combination and a fallen combination are won at the same time without any special combination being won in RT (2), RT (2) does not end even if the selected fallen combination wins a prize. However, RT (2) does not end even if a fallen role wins in a state where any special role is carried over in RT (2), and any special role in RT (2) However, RT (2) may be terminated when the special combination and the falling combination are won at the same time and the selected falling combination wins. In this case, RT (2) will end, but the falling combination wins, and even if RT (2) ends, the player's expectation that the special combination is elected will be raised. it can.

  In the embodiment, three types of combinations are applied as the falling combination, but it may be one or two types, or may be four or more types.

  In the above-described embodiment, all types of operational procedures that can be operated by the player are always assigned a winning procedure for any type of falling combination, and an operation for avoiding winning of any type of falling combination. The procedure always includes a winning procedure for at least one other fallen role so that there is no avoidance procedure common to all types of fallen roles. A configuration in which a part or all of the winning procedure is common may be used.

  Furthermore, an operation procedure that avoids winnings may be provided for all the falling combinations for all the operation procedures that can be operated by the player. In such a case, it is ensured by the technical intervention of the player. RT (2) can be continued up to the prescribed number of games. In this case, it is preferable to provide an operation procedure that can avoid both the special combination and the fallen combination. By doing so, both the special combination and the fallen combination can be avoided by a common operation procedure.

  In the above-described embodiment, the transition from the next game to the normal game state is made at the time when the falling combination wins in RT (2). For example, the number of games ( For example, when a special RT transition combination that ends in one game) is applied and the falling combination wins, the transition to the normal gaming state may be performed via the special RT.

  In the above embodiment, the winning probabilities of all types of falling combinations are the same probability, but different winning probabilities may be obtained depending on the types of falling combinations, and in this way, the winning probability is the highest in the normal gaming state. By performing a stop operation in the winning procedure for a high type of falling role, the payout rate of medals in the normal gaming state can be increased, and during RT (2), a procedure for avoiding a type of falling role with a high winning probability can be used. By performing the stop operation, it is possible to increase the probability of avoiding the end of RT (2). That is, since the difference in the player's advantage depends on whether or not the player performs technical intervention, the interest can be enhanced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the symbols constituting the falling combination are arranged beyond the drawing range, so that the winning of the falling combination can be avoided by stopping the reel at a timing outside the drawing range. For example, a different reel stop order for avoiding winnings is determined for a plurality of falling roles, and when one of the falling roles is elected, a winning determined according to the type of the falling role When the stop operation is performed in the order of stopping the reels in order to avoid the game, control is made so that the falling combination is lost, and the stop operation is performed in an order different from the stop order of the reels in order to avoid the winning In addition, the falling combination may be awarded, and in this way, it is possible to prevent the falling combination from winning by a relatively simple technical intervention. In this case, it is preferable that other small roles are elected at the same time as the fallen role, and when the fallen role is missed, the other small roles that are elected at the same time win the prize. Even if a fallen role is missed, a small role wins and a medal can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, when the falling combination notification lottery is won, the falling combination notification number of times that the type of the falling combination can be identified when the falling combination is won at RT (2) is executed. Is selected from a plurality of different numbers of times, and when the falling role is won in RT (2), which is subsequently transferred, according to the number of falling role notifications won in the notification number lottery. The number of continued games of RT (1) is changed by changing the number of times that the role type notification is executed. For example, the probability that the falling role type notification is executed is selected from a plurality of different probabilities. The number of games that can be expected to continue RT (2) may be changed by executing a fallen role type notification based on the selected probability. Even in this case, the interest associated with RT (2) may be changed. The higher Rukoto can.

  In the above embodiment, when any special combination is won in RT (2) and the special combination is notified, either red cherry, blue cherry or white cherry is selected. The fall type combination notification is executed and these winning roles can be won. However, any special role is won in RT (2) and the special role is notified. In this state, when one of the cherries wins, only the falling combination winning notification may be performed, and then the falling combination type notification may be executed when any of the cherries wins. Therefore, after the special role is announced, the notification of the type of the falling role of the cherry is not always executed, but the type of cherry selected by the player matches the type of the cherry actually won first. Will be tumble role type notification is executed, the start trigger of fall role type notification, that is, to have a change in response to transition to a more favorable state.

  In the above embodiment, when notifying that any special role is won during RT (2), a background selection lottery for selecting the background of the display screen is performed, and the background of the display screen is selected as the background selection lottery. The background is changed to the background selected in step 1, but at least if the effect mode is changed, the same effect can be obtained. For example, the lighting mode of BGM, effect sound effect, LED, lamp, etc. May be changed.

  In the above embodiment, the production mode is changed with a probability corresponding to the type of the special role won, but the timing of changing the production mode with the probability according to the type of the special role won (at the start of the game) , 1st stop, 2nd stop, 3rd stop, winning a winning combination, etc.), and even in this case, the special that was won according to the timing of changing the production mode Since it becomes possible to suggest the kind of role, interest can be improved more effectively.

  In the above embodiment, even if a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the game, the number of bets before the certain time (30 seconds) elapses after the game ends when the credit settlement operation is performed. Is set, and even if a certain amount of time has elapsed since the game ended, when the betting amount is settled and a standby command is transmitted, the normal volume (MAX) is set without waiting for the certain amount of time to elapse. For example, in the case of playing a game using a game ball as described later, a control for lowering the game sound effect being output is performed. The operation of returning the game ball from the upper plate where the game ball supplied to the take-in device waits to the lower plate from which the game ball returned from the take-in device, etc. is discharged, inside the take-in device The remaining game balls in the lower plate When an operation to be rejected is made, even if a certain time (30 seconds) has not elapsed since the game ended, the game sound effect that is being output at normal volume (MAX) without waiting for the certain time to elapse Control (silence control) may be performed, and even in such a configuration, even if a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the previous game ended, the player Since the volume of the continuous game sound effect can be reduced by the intention of the player, even if the game is interrupted, the surrounding players are not disturbed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the method of restricting connector removal by attaching the connector restricting members 500a and 500b to the board case 200 is the same as the cable 600a and the game control board 40 that connect the game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110. Although it is applied to the connector connection between the cable 600d for connecting the production relay board 80 and the game control board 40, it may be applied to other connector connections.

  In the above embodiment, a method for restricting the release of the connection between the connectors is described. For example, an electronic component that inputs and outputs signals necessary for the progress of the game, such as the inserted medal sensor 31 and the start switch 7, It is preferable to attach a covering member that is inaccessible from the outside to the connection part between the electronic component and the cable, and in this way, an electronic component that inputs and outputs signals necessary for the progress of the game It is possible to prevent an unauthorized device such as a driving device from being attached to the connection portion with the cable. In addition, it is preferable to adopt a structure in which a trace remains (such as a structure that cannot be removed unless a part of the covering member is destroyed) when the covering member that covers the connection portion between the electronic component and the cable is removed. By doing so, it becomes possible to leave a trace on which the illegal device is attached, and it is possible to grasp the possibility that there was an illegal act after the fact.

  In the above-described embodiment, the connector restriction members 500a and 500b are configured separately from the board case 200, and the board case 200 is removed from the mounting base 250, whereby the connector restriction members 500a and 500b are removed from the board case 200 and the connector is removed. For example, when the connector restriction members 500a and 500b are once attached to the board case 200, a part of the board case 200 or the connector restriction members 500a and 500b must be destroyed. For example, the connector restriction members 500a and 500b may be removed from the board case 200 so that the restriction on connector removal cannot be released.

  In the embodiment, the connector regulating members 500a and 500b are constituted by the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520, and after attaching the attachment side member 510 to the board case 200, the cable side connector is connected to the board side connector. In this state, by attaching the connector cover 520 to the attachment side member 510, the removal of the connector is restricted, but it is integrated from the beginning with the cable side connector connected to the board side connector. The connector restriction members 500a and 500b may be attached to the board case 200 to restrict the connector from being removed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the connector restricting members 500a and 500b are used as the method for restricting the release of the connection between the board-side connector and the cable-side connector of the board accommodated in the board case has been described. May be.

  A modification of the method for restricting the removal of the cable-side connector from the board-side connector will be described below.

  [Modification 1]

  FIG. 59 is a perspective view showing the structure of the substrate case 700 and the connector cover 710 in the first modification.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the board case 700 in Modification 1 is composed of a lower case 700a that houses the game control board 40 and an upper case 700b that covers the upper part of the lower case 700a. Each of the lower case 700a and the upper case 700b is provided with a corresponding sealing piece (not shown) as in the case of the substrate case 200 of the above-described embodiment. If the sealing piece is not cut by being fixed by the fixing member, the game control board 40 opened and accommodated cannot be taken out.

  In the upper case 700b, an insertion hole 701 for inserting the board-side connector 620a is formed at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the stored game control board 40. Further, locking pieces 702 and 702 each having a locking hole 703 are erected in the vicinity of both sides of the insertion hole 701 of the upper case 700b.

  The connector cover 710 is formed in a box shape in which the lower surface and the rear surface in the drawing are opened, and has a length that can cover the board-side connector 620a and the locking pieces 702 and 702 with the openings on the lower surface and the rear surface.

  The front surface of the connector cover 710 in the figure relates to positions corresponding to the locking holes 703 and 703 formed in the locking pieces 702 and 702 when the board-side connector 620a and the locking pieces 702 and 702 are covered. Stop holes 711 and 711 are formed, and concave grooves 712 and 712 larger in diameter than the locking holes 711 and 711 are formed in the periphery thereof.

  Thin portions 715 are formed by forming notches 713 and long holes 714 at positions from the center of the locking holes 711 and 711 on the front surface and the upper surface of the connector cover 710 in the drawing.

  Next, a method for restricting the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector and a method for canceling the cable side connector in Modification 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 60, with the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a, the connector cover 710 covers the cable side connector 610a and the locking pieces 702, 702 connected to the board side connector 620a. . As a result, the locking holes 711 and 711 of the connector cover 710 and the locking holes 703 and 703 of the locking piece 702 are in communication with each other, and the locking pins 720 are attached to the communicating locking holes 711 and 703. To do.

  The locking pin 720 is a member in which a locking claw 721 whose tip is elastically deformable inward is formed on the head having substantially the same diameter as the concave groove 712. As shown in the enlarged sectional view of FIG. By inserting the locking claw 721 side of the locking pin 720 into the locking hole 711 and the locking hole 703, the locking claw 721 is elastically deformed inward, and the head of the locking pin 720 is formed in the concave groove 712. By inserting until it is filled, the elastic deformation of the locking claw 721 is released, the locking claw 721 engages with the locking piece 702, and the locking pin 720 cannot be removed from the connector cover 710 and the locking piece 702. Accordingly, the connector cover 710 is fixed so as not to be removable from the upper case 700b via the locking piece 702.

  As shown in FIG. 60, the connector cover 710 covers the cable side connector 610a and the locking pieces 702 and 702 connected to the board side connector 620a, and the locking pins 720 are mounted in the locking holes 711 and 703. As a result, the cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a is covered with the connector cover 710 and the surface of the upper case 700b, and movement of the cable-side connector 610a with respect to the board-side connector 620a is restricted. Therefore, the removal of the cable side connector 610a with respect to the board side connector 620a is restricted. Further, since the connector cover 710 is fixed so as not to be detached from the upper case 700b via the locking piece 702 by mounting the locking pin 720, the locking piece 702 of the connector cover 710 or the upper case 700b must be destroyed. The connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a cannot be released.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 61, the thin portion 715 formed in the connector cover 710 is cut with a tool such as a nipper N so that the connector cover 710 is connected to the board-side connector 620a as shown in FIG. The covered portion of the cable-side connector 610a is separated from the portions 710 ′ and 710 ′ connected to the locking pieces 702 and 702, and the covering is released to release the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a. It becomes possible. Even in this case, since the portions 710 ′ and 710 ′ of the connector cover 710 connected to the locking pieces 702 and 702 remain fixed to the upper case 700b, the connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a is left. You can leave a trace that has been released.

  In the method of the first modification, the locking pieces 702 and 702 are erected on the upper case 700b. However, as in the above-described embodiment, the attachment pieces are attached to the board case and formed on the attachment side member. A locking member is provided upright near both sides of the insertion hole through which the board-side connector 620a is inserted, and the connector cover 710 is fixed to the locking piece of the attachment-side member to constitute a connector restricting member. In this way, even when the board is exchanged together with the board case, the board case can be opened without breaking the board case and opening it, or breaking the mounting side member or the connector cover 710 and separating them. The connection between the connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a can be released.

  [Modification 2]

  FIG. 63 is a perspective view showing the structure of the substrate case 730 and the connector cover 740 in the second modification.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the board case 730 according to the second modification includes a lower case 730a that houses the game control board 40 and an upper case 730b that covers the upper part of the lower case 730a. Each of the lower case 730a and the upper case 730b is provided with a corresponding sealing piece (not shown) as in the case of the substrate case 200 of the above-described embodiment. If the sealing piece is not cut by being fixed by the fixing member, the game control board 40 opened and accommodated cannot be taken out.

  In the upper case 730b, an insertion hole 731 for inserting the board-side connector 620a is formed at a location corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the stored game control board 40. Further, locking pins 735 and 735 are formed in the vicinity of both sides of the insertion hole 731 of the upper case 730b, and locking pins 735 and 735 each having locking claws 736 and 736 whose tips are elastically deformable inward.

  Further, the connector cover 740 is formed so that the lower surface and the rear surface in the figure are opened, can cover the board-side connector 620a, and has a length longer than the separation width of the locking pins 735 and 735. . Further, attachment surfaces 746 and 746 are formed on part of the lower surface of both ends of the connector cover 740. When the board-side connector 620a is covered on the attachment surfaces 746 and 746, the locking pins 735 and 735 are formed. Slots 747 and 747 are respectively formed at positions corresponding to. Each of the long holes 747 has a long diameter in a direction perpendicular to the locking claws 736 and 736 of the locking pin 735, and the width of the short diameter portion of the long hole 747 is the same as that of the locking claws 736 and 736. It is formed narrower than the distance between the tips.

  Thin portions 745 are formed by forming a notch 743 and a long hole 744 at positions from the center of the long holes 747 and 747 on the front and top surfaces of the connector cover 740 in the drawing.

  Next, a method for restricting the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector and a method for canceling the cable side connector in Modification 2 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in the enlarged sectional view of FIG. 63, with the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a, the locking pins 735, 735 of the upper case 730b are connected to both mounting surfaces 746, 746 of the connector cover 740. The formed long holes 747 and 747 are inserted. When the locking pins 735 and 735 are inserted into the long holes 747 and 747, the locking claws 736 and 736 are elastically deformed inward, until the mounting surface 746 of the connector cover 740 and the upper surface of the upper case 730b come into contact with each other. By inserting the locking pins 735 and 735, the elastic deformation of the locking claws 736 and 736 is released, the locking claws 736 and 736 engage with the mounting surface 746, and the locking pins 735 and 735 are connected to the connector cover. The connector cover 740 is fixed to the upper case 730b through the locking pins 735 and 735 so as not to be removed.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the connector cover 740 covers the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a, and the locking pins 735 and 735 are attached to the long holes 747, whereby the connector cover 740 and the upper case 730b are attached. The cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a is covered with the surface of the cable, and movement of the cable-side connector 610a with respect to the board-side connector 620a is restricted, so that the cable-side connector 610a with respect to the board-side connector 620a is restricted. Withdrawal will be regulated. Further, the connector cover 740 is fixed so that the connector cover 740 cannot be removed from the upper case 730b via the locking pins 735 and 735 when the locking pins 735 and 735 are locked to the long holes 747 and 747. The connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a cannot be released unless the locking pins 735 and 735 of the connector cover 740 or the upper case 730b are broken.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 64, by cutting the thin portion 745 formed in the connector cover 740 with a tool such as a nipper N, the connector cover 740 is connected to the board side connector 620a as shown in FIG. The covered portion of the cable-side connector 610a is separated from the portions 740 ′ and 740 ′ connected to the locking pins 735 and 735, and the covering is released to release the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a. It becomes possible.

  66. As shown in FIG. 66, the removal of the portion 740 ′ with the connector cover 740 connected is performed so that the connector cover 740 with the connector cover 740 connected is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the long hole 747 (the vertical direction in FIG. 66). Rotate 'in the black arrow direction a in the figure. As a result, the engagement of the portion 740 ′ where the locking pin 735 and the connector cover 740 are connected is released. Then, the portions 740 ′ and 740 ′ with the connector cover 740 connected can be removed from the upper case 730 b by pulling out the portions 740 ′ with the connector cover 740 connected in the black arrow direction b in the figure. Even in this case, the connector cover 740 is destroyed and cannot be returned to the original state, so that a trace remains that the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a is released.

  In the method of the modification 2, the locking pins 735 and 735 are erected on the upper case 730b. However, as in the above embodiment, the locking pins 735 and 735 are provided on the mounting side member and formed on the mounting side member. The locking pins 735 and 735 are erected in the vicinity of both sides of the insertion hole for allowing the board-side connector 620a to pass therethrough, and the connector cover 740 is fixed to the locking pins 735 and 735 of the mounting side member. A restricting member may be configured. In this way, even when the board is replaced with the board case, the board case is broken and opened, or the attachment side member or the connector cover 740 is broken and separated. The connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a can be released without being released.

  [Modification 3]

  FIG. 67 is a perspective view showing the structure of the substrate case 750 and the connector cover 760 in the third modification.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the board case 750 according to the third modification includes a lower case 750a that houses the game control board 40 and an upper case 750b that covers the upper part of the lower case 750a. Each of the lower case 750a and the upper case 750b is provided with a corresponding sealing piece (not shown) like the substrate case 200 of the above-described embodiment, and the corresponding sealing pieces are connected to each other by a one-way screw or the like. If the sealing piece is not cut by being fixed by the fixing member, the game control board 40 opened and accommodated cannot be taken out.

  In the upper case 750b, an insertion hole 751 for inserting the board-side connector 620a is formed at a location corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the stored game control board 40. In addition, attachment holes 754 and 754 are formed on the side surface of the upper case 750b located behind the insertion hole 751. A locking piece 752 having a locking hole 753 is provided in the vicinity of the insertion hole 751 of the upper case 750b in the lower case 750a.

  The connector cover 760 is formed so as to open from the lower surface to the rear surface in the drawing, and has a length that can cover the board-side connector 620a. On the rear surface of the connector cover 760 in the figure, when the board-side connector 620a is covered, mounting pieces 764 and 764 having locking claws at the tips project from the rear at positions corresponding to the mounting holes 754 and 754. Has been. Further, on the front surface of the connector cover 760 in the figure, a locking piece 762 having a locking hole 763 is formed at a position corresponding to the locking piece 752 when the board-side connector 620a is covered.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a method for restricting the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector and a method for releasing the same in the third modification will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 68A, the cable-side connector 610a connected to the board-side connector 620a is covered with the connector cover 760 in a state where the cable-side connector 610a is connected to the board-side connector 620a. When the corresponding mounting pieces 764 and 764 of the connector cover 760 are inserted into the mounting holes 754 and 754 of the upper case 750b, the locking claws of the mounting pieces 764 and 764 engage with the mounting holes 754 and 754, and the connector cover 760 is The upper case 750b cannot be removed. When the connector cover 760 is attached to the upper case 750b in this way, the engagement holes 763 of the engagement pieces 762 of the connector cover 760 and the engagement holes 753 of the engagement pieces 752 of the lower case 750a are in communication with each other. The binding band 769 is attached to the locking hole 763 and the locking hole 753.

  As shown in FIG. 68, the binding band 769 is formed with a label portion 768 to which an ID number or the like capable of ID management is assigned, an engaging portion 766 in which an engaging hole 766a is formed, and partially formed at a predetermined pitch. And a band portion 767 having a locking projection 767a. The engagement hole 766a is engaged with the locking projection 767a when the band portion 767 is inserted into the engagement hole 766a. An engagement claw (not shown) is formed to be stopped. Thus, once the band portion 767 is inserted into the engagement hole 766a, the removal of the band portion 767 in the opposite direction to the direction of insertion through the engagement hole 766a is restricted.

  When the band portion 767 of the binding band 769 is inserted through the engagement hole 766a, the band portion 767 is disengaged from the engagement hole 766a due to the engagement between the locking protrusion 767a of the band portion 767 and the engagement claw of the engagement hole 766a. Since the removal is restricted, the locking piece 762 and the locking piece 752 are fixed. Then, the engagement between the attachment pieces 764 and 764 and the attachment holes 754 and 754 and the connection with the engagement pieces 762 and the engagement pieces 752 by the binding band 769 restrict the movement of the connector cover 760 in the vertical and horizontal directions. Is attached to the substrate case in a non-removable manner with respect to 750.

  As shown in FIG. 68B, when the connector cover 760 is attached to the board case 750, the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a is covered with the connector cover 760, and the cable to the board side connector 620a is covered. Since the movement of the side connector 610a in the pulling direction is restricted, the removal of the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a is restricted. Further, the mounting pieces 764 and 764 engage with the mounting holes 754 and 754, and the locking pieces 762 and the locking pieces 752 are fixed so as not to be detached by the binding band 769. Therefore, the substrate is not cut unless the binding band 769 is cut. The connection between the side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a cannot be released.

  For releasing the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a, for example, by cutting the binding band 769 with a tool such as a nipper, the fixing of the locking piece 762 and the locking piece 752 is released, and the connector Since the cover 760 can be opened upward and the cable-side connector 610a can be moved in the pulling direction, the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a can be released. Even if the binding band 769 is cut and replaced with a new binding band, the ID number or the like is given to the label portion 768 of the binding band 769, so that the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a is established. The released trace can be left.

  In the method of the third modification, the locking piece 752 protrudes from the lower case 730a. However, the mounting piece is provided with an attachment side member attached to the board case as in the above embodiment, and the attachment side member has an attachment hole and an engagement member. The connector restricting member may be configured by providing a locking piece having a stop hole and fixing the connector cover 760 to the locking piece of the attachment side member. Even when the entire board case is replaced, the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a can be disconnected without breaking and opening the board case or forming the binding band 769.

  [Modification 4]

  FIG. 69 is a perspective view showing the structure of the substrate case 770 and the connector cover 780 in the fourth modification.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the board case 770 in the fourth modification is composed of a lower case 770a that houses the game control board 40 and an upper case 770b that covers the upper part of the lower case 770a. Each of the lower case 770a and the upper case 770b is provided with a corresponding sealing piece (not shown) similarly to the substrate case 200 of the above-described embodiment, and the corresponding sealing pieces are connected to each other by a one-way screw or the like. If the sealing piece is not cut by being fixed by the fixing member, the game control board 40 opened and accommodated cannot be taken out.

  In the upper case 770b, an insertion hole 771 for inserting the board-side connector 620a is formed at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the stored game control board 40. Further, locking pieces 772 and 772 formed with locking holes 773 and 773 project from the front surface of the lower case 770a in the vicinity of the insertion hole 771.

  The connector cover 780 is formed so that a lower surface and a rear surface in the drawing are opened, and has a length capable of covering the board-side connector 620a.

  Locking pieces 782 and 782 project from the front surface of the connector cover 780 in the figure at positions corresponding to the locking pieces 772 and 772 when the board-side connector 620a is covered. The locking pieces 782 and 782 are formed with locking holes 783 and 783 at positions corresponding to the locking holes 773 and 773 formed in the locking pieces 772 and 772. A step portion capable of accommodating a screw head is formed on the upper portion of the locking hole 783.

  Next, a method for restricting the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector and a method for releasing the cable side connector according to Modification 4 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 70, in a state where the cable side connector 610a is connected to the board side connector 620a, the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a is covered with a connector cover 780. Then, in a state where the locking holes 783 and 783 of the locking pieces 782 and 782 of the connector cover 780 are in communication with the locking holes 773 and 773 of the locking pieces 772 and 772, any one of these communicating locking holes 783. And, as shown in FIG. 71, the one-way screw P is screwed into the corresponding locking holes 773 and 773 until the head is accommodated in the stepped portion.

  As a result, the locking piece 782 of the connector cover 780 and the locking piece 772 of the lower case 770a are fixed, and the connector cover 780 is fixed to the board case 770 so as not to be detached. In this state, the cable side connector 610a connected to the board side connector 620a is covered with the connector cover 780 and the surface of the upper case 770b, and movement of the cable side connector 610a with respect to the board side connector 620a is restricted. Therefore, the removal of the cable side connector 610a with respect to the board side connector 620a is restricted. Further, since the connector cover 780 is fixed so as not to be detached from the board case 770 by screwing the one-way screw P, the board-side connector 620a and the cable side are not damaged unless the locking piece 772 of the connector cover 780 or the lower case 770a is broken. The connection with the connector 610a cannot be released.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the connector cover 780 is formed by breaking the locking piece 782 fixed to the locking piece 772 with a tool such as a nipper N among the locking pieces 782 and 782 formed on the connector cover 780. 780 can be removed from the board case 770, and by removing the connector cover 780 from the board case 770, the cable side connector 610a can be moved in the pulling direction, and the connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a can be performed. It becomes possible to cancel. Even in this case, the locking piece 782 broken from the main body of the connector cover 780 remains in a state of being fixed to the locking piece 772, so that the connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a is removed. Can leave.

  The connector cover 780 is formed with a plurality of locking pieces 782 and a plurality of locking pieces 772 corresponding to the lower case 770a, and any one of the plurality of locking pieces 782 is formed. Since the connector cover 780 is fixed to the board case 770 in a non-removable manner only by fixing the locking piece 772 corresponding to one, and the release of the connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a is restricted. Even if the locking piece 782 is broken, the connector cover 780 is removed, and the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a is released, if the unused locking piece 782 remains, the unused engagement By fixing the stopper piece 782 and the corresponding locking piece 772, the removed connector cover 780 cannot be removed again from the board case 770. Fixed, it is possible to regulate the release of the connection between the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a. That is, while the unused locking piece 782 remains, the connector cover 780 can be used repeatedly and can be reused while leaving the removed trace.

  In the method of the modified example 4, the locking pieces 772 and 772 protrude from the lower case 770a. However, the mounting piece is attached to the board case as in the above embodiment, and is locked to the mounting side member. By providing a locking piece having a hole and fixing the locking piece of the attachment side member and the locking piece 782 of the connector cover 780, the connector restricting member may be configured. Even when the board is replaced with the board case, the board-side connector 620a and the cable-side connector 610a are disconnected without breaking and opening the board case or breaking the mounting-side member or the connector cover 780 and separating them. can do.

  In the above embodiment, the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 constituting the substrate case 200 are sealed and the substrate case 200 is fixed to the mounting base 250 using a one-way screw. You may perform using other members, such as using a locking pin.

  In the above embodiment, a slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine for setting bets using game balls, It may be a full credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in a game ball, and a take-in ball that detects a game ball taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 32C, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, and a payout ball detection switch for detecting a game ball paid out by the ball payout device It is possible to set a bet number using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out by winning.

  Second Embodiment A slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  In the first embodiment, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), and regular bonus, whereas in this embodiment, the gaming state is the initial gaming state, RT (3), It consists of RT (4), RT (5), and regular bonus.

  The initial gaming state is a gaming state other than RT (3), RT (4), and RT (5), which will be described later, during the regular bonus. After the end, the process proceeds after the end of RT (4) and after the end of RT (5). The regular bonus is the same as in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, when the replay (1) or Bell wins in the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special part is elected), the special part (only when the special part is not carried over) and Although the lottery probability of the small role is the same as the initial gaming state, the replay time (3) in which the lottery probability of the replay (2) is higher than the initial gaming state and the medal payout rate per game is less than 1. ) (RT (3)). While the gaming state is at RT (3), the flag during RT (3) is set in the RAM 41c. RT (3) is a specified number of games without winning any special role (in this embodiment, if RT (3) is transferred by replay (1) winning 200 games, RT transferred by bell winning (3) 100 games), or by winning any special role before reaching the specified number of games.

  In addition, when one of the red cherries, blue cherries, or white cherries wins in the initial game state (except when any special part is elected), the special part (only if the special part is not carried over) ) And the small lottery probability is the same as the initial game state, but the replay (1) lottery probability is higher than the initial game state, and the payout rate of medals per game exceeds one (1) 4) Control to (RT (4)). While the gaming state is at RT (4), the flag during RT (4) is set in the RAM 41c. RT (4) reaches the specified number of games (100 games in this embodiment) without winning any special role, or wins any special role before reaching the specified number of games. It comes to end with.

  RT (4) can be shifted only from the initial gaming state, and even if any of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry wins during RT (3), the transition is made to RT (4). Once it is controlled to RT (3), RT (3) ends and then RT (4) is reached until either Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, or White Cherry wins in the initial gaming state. There is no migration.

  Replay (2) in the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special combination is won), RT (3), RT (4) (excluding the state where any special combination is winning) When winning a prize, the lottery probability of special roles (only when special roles are not carried over) and small roles are the same as the initial gaming state, but the lottery probability of replay (1) is higher than the initial gaming state And a replay time (5) (RT (5)) in which the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 1 is controlled. While the gaming state is at RT (5), the flag during RT (5) is set in the RAM 41c. The RT (5) continues until any special role is won, and ends when any special role is won.

  In the present embodiment, in the initial gaming state, RT (3), the medal payout rate is less than 1, so the medal is reduced. In RT (4) and RT (5), the medal payout rate is Since it exceeds 1, the number of medals will increase. In addition, the magnitude relationship between the payout rates of medals in each of these gaming states is RT (4)> RT (5)> RT (3)> initial gaming state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special combination is won), that is, after the end of the big bonus, after the setting change, after the end of RT (3) or RT (4) In the gaming state after the end, there is a possibility that both RT (3) in which an increase in medals cannot be expected and RT (4) in which an increase in medals can be expected. For this reason, once the transition from the initial gaming state to RT (4), there will be provided an opportunity to transition to RT (4) again even after RT (4) is completed, and the RT (4) is periodically controlled. It becomes possible to do. On the other hand, when transitioning from the initial gaming state to RT (3), there is no transition to RT (4) until the end of the RT (3), but when RT (3) ends, the initial gaming state is entered again. Even in such a case, an opportunity to shift to RT (4) periodically comes. In other words, the initial gaming state functions as a chance zone that may shift to RT (4) where an increase in medals can be expected, and even if such a chance zone shifts to RT (3), it shifts to RT (4). Even if you do, you will visit periodically.

  In addition, when one of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry wins in the initial game state, the game moves to RT (4) where an increase in medals can be expected. Because the stop operation cannot be performed simultaneously with the “Red Cherry”, “Blue Cherry”, and “White Cherry” symbols on the left reel, the red reel, blue cherry, or white cherry can be used in the initial gaming state. If you don't know the type, you wo n’t be able to win the winning cherries, and you wo n’t be able to win the winning cherries with a 1/3 chance. Yes, but you won't be able to move to RT (4) in this case because you missed the winning cherry with a probability of 2/3.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when any special role is won after the start of RT (4) where an increase in medals can be expected and before reaching the prescribed number of games, RT (4) is terminated when any special role wins without ending RT (4), or when the specified number of games is reached without winning any special role, After RT (4) starts, even if any special role is won before reaching the specified number of games, if the selected special role does not win, RT (4) ends with the winning of the special role Without winning the winning special role, it is possible to continue to control RT (4) until the specified number of games is reached, so even if the special role is won in RT (4) If you don't win the winning special role, It is possible to digest the RT (4) until it reaches the number of the constant game, never would cause losses feeling to the player.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the special role is carried over after the next game until the special role is won, after the RT (4) reaches the specified number of games, the special role won during that time is won. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the special role at the end of RT (4).

  In the initial gaming state, there is a possibility that one of the red cherries, the blue cherries, and the white cherries wins, and there is a possibility of shifting to RT (4), which is advantageous for a player who can expect an increase in medals. 1) If any of the bells wins, an increase in medals cannot be expected, and there is a possibility of shifting to RT (3), which is disadvantageous for a player who does not shift to RT (4). When the replay (1) and the bell are won in the initial game state, the game moves to RT (3), which is disadvantageous for the player. However, when RT (3) is completed, the game is shifted to the initial game state again. For this reason, even in the case of transitioning to RT (3) without transitioning to RT (4) in the initial gaming state, the transition to the initial gaming state is performed again thereafter, so there is a possibility of transitioning to RT (4) periodically. The initial gaming state will come, and the player's expectation for RT (4) can be maintained.

  Also, in the initial gaming state, when any of red cherry, blue cherry, or white cherry is won, the operating procedure that matches the winning conditions of the winning cherry, that is, the pull-in range of the combination of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry Since the player can make a stop operation at the internal timing, that is, the player can make a transition to RT (4) by technical intervention of the player, the interest in the initial gaming state can be enhanced. At this time, the operation procedure as a winning condition varies depending on the type of cherry, and since there is no common winning procedure for all types of cherries, the player guesses which type of cherries was won, Whether or not to shift to RT (4) is determined depending on whether or not the game is won, and the interest in the initial gaming state can be further enhanced.

  In addition, even if replay (1) or bell wins in the initial gaming state and the transition to RT (3) where no increase in medals can be expected, an increase in medals can be expected in RT (3) and either RT (3) for which an increase in medals cannot be expected because the winning probability of Replay (2), which will continue to RT (5), which continues until the special role is won, is higher than the initial gaming state and RT (4) Even in the case of shifting to, the player's expectation for shifting to RT (5) can be enhanced.

  As described above, the second embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and changes and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment is also applicable to the second embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, the lottery probability of replay (2) is increased in RT (3). However, it is sufficient that at least the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) is increased. The lottery probability of 1) may be increased, or the lottery probability of both replay (1) and replay (2) may be increased. Furthermore, although the lottery probability of one type of replay decreases, even if the lottery probability of the other type of replay increases, the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) increases as a result. good.

  In the second embodiment, the lottery probability of replay (1) is increased in RT (4), but it is sufficient that at least the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) is increased. The lottery probability of 2) may be increased, or the lottery probabilities of both replay (1) and replay (2) may be increased. Furthermore, although the lottery probability of one type of replay decreases, even if the lottery probability of the other type of replay increases, the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) increases as a result. good.

  In the second embodiment, in the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special combination is elected), RT (3), RT (4) (excluding the state where any special combination is elected) When the replay (2) wins, the control is made to RT (5). However, when the replay (2) wins only in one specific gaming state (for example, the initial gaming state), RT ( 5) may be controlled, and in this way, by controlling to a specific gaming state, it is possible to effectively enhance the player's expectation to move to RT (5). it can.

  A third embodiment of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  In the first embodiment described above, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), and regular bonus, whereas in this embodiment, the gaming state is based on the normal gaming state, RT, and regular bonus. Become.

  In the first embodiment described above, the red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry were paid out at the time of winning one (three in order to match the three winning lines), whereas in this embodiment, the red cherry was used. , Blue cherry and white cherry are paid out at the time of winning 15 prizes.

  In this embodiment, when any special combination is won in the normal gaming state, the lottery probability of the small combination is the same as in the normal gaming state, but the combined probability of the replay (1) and the replay (2) is the normal game. Control is performed at a replay time (RT) that has a higher probability than the state. While the gaming state is at RT, the RT flag is set in the RAM 41c. The RT ends when the selected special role wins.

  The payout rate of medals per game in RT exceeds 1 based on the lottery probability, but red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries cannot simultaneously aim for the symbols that make up these roles. The appearance rate is 1/3, and considering this, the actual payout rate of medals per game in RT is less than 1, and the number of medals decreases.

  The CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment performs an AT lottery to determine whether or not to control to the assist time in which the cherry type notification that notifies the type of cherry is executed when any special role is won. Do.

  When the CPU 91a wins the AT lottery, the CPU 91a controls the assist time until the end condition is satisfied, and when the red cherry, the blue cherry, or the white cherry wins during that time, a cherry type notification that notifies the type is given. Execute. Then, when the assist time ends, the type of the special combination won is notified.

  As with the fall type combination notification in Example 1, the cherry type notification is a color indicating that the red cherry was elected, the blue cherry was elected, and the white cherry was elected (the red cherry was elected) To indicate the type of the winning cherry by notifying red, blue if the blue cherry is winning, and blue if the white cherry is winning) However, it is sufficient that the player can recognize the type of the selected cherry, and the type of the selected cherry itself, or the combination of symbols, the symbols that differ depending on the type of cherry, images that suggest these types of cherries, etc. A notification may be made by displaying on the liquid crystal display 51, or a notification may be made by lighting a corresponding LED, outputting a corresponding sound, or the like. Furthermore, a symbol that is an index of a symbol that differs depending on the type of cherry (such as a symbol that is located near the symbol of the cherry and that stands out from the symbol of the cherry), an image that suggests the symbol, etc. Anyway.

  The assist time end condition can be selected in various ways, for example, winning a special role won, the number of games and cherry type notifications, the number of times a cherry wins a specified number, This includes winning or winning a prize, reaching a specified number of winning or winning times for a specific role, winning a final lottery, etc. Further, the end condition may be changed during the assist time.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the “red cherry” symbol, “blue cherry” symbol, and “white cherry” symbol of the left reel constituting red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry are intentionally stopped on the winning line. Therefore, even if red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries are elected, it is impossible to deliberately win these red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries. Although it is possible to win with a probability of 1/3, it will be missed with a probability of 2/3.

  On the other hand, in assist time, when one of red cherry, blue cherry, or white cherry is elected, the cherry type notification is executed, so that the player can select red cherry, blue cherry according to the notified color. It is possible to recognize which kind of cherry is won among the white cherries, and the red reel, blue cherries, and white cherries that make up the left cherry “red cherries”, “blue cherries” and “white” It is possible to specify the stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol stops on the winning line, and it is possible to win all the winning cherries.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the substantial payout rate of medals per game at RT is less than 1, and the number of medals will decrease, but the red cherry won by being controlled by the assist time, Since all blue cherries and white cherries can be won, the payout rate of medals per game in this case exceeds 1.

  For this reason, when one of the special roles is won and controlled by RT, the medal will increase while controlled by the assist time. Therefore, RT will be awarded without winning the selected special role. It is possible to win more medals if you continue. On the other hand, after the assist time is over, medals will decrease and no special lottery will be drawn, so it is advantageous for the player to finish the RT by winning the winning special role .

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when any special combination is won, it is controlled to RT that increases the winning probability of the re-playing combination. It is possible to reduce the amount of medals consumed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, by controlling the assist time during RT, when any of the cherries is won, a cherry type notification for notifying the type of the cherries is executed, and the winning cherries can be won. Since the medal can be increased, the expectation for winning the special role can be further increased. Further, even after the assist time is over, a special role can always be won, so that more medals can be expected.

  Also, if the assist time is not controlled during RT, medals will decrease, so it is not advantageous for the player to prolong the RT without winning the special role after winning the special role. After the assist time is over, the player can be promptly prompted to win a special role.

  As described above, the third embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the third embodiment, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as in the first or second embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first or second embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment or the second embodiment can also be applied to the third embodiment.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 32L, 32C, 32R Reel motor 34 Hopper unit 35 Overflow tank 35a Full sensor 41 Main controller 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
91 Sub-control unit 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (1)

A variable display device capable of deriving and displaying a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and one game is obtained by displaying the display result in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine that can be awarded according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Before a display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived, a re-game winning with a re-game grant that allows a game to be played without using the game value and a grant of the game value are performed. A pre-determining means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings including the accompanying winning winnings;
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Derivation control means for performing control to derive the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
Re-playing high probability state control means for controlling to a re-playing high probability state in which the pre-determining means performs the determination to allow the occurrence of the re-game winning with a higher probability than the normal gaming state;
After the replay high probability state starts, a replay high probability state end means for ending the replay high probability state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied;
With
The re-playing high probability state ending means, after the re-playing high probability state has started, when a specific winning prize out of the awarded winnings occurs before the digested game number reaches a prescribed game number, or When the specified number of games is reached without generating a specific prize, the replay high probability state is terminated.
The derivation control means includes
For each of a plurality of predetermined operation timings, a predetermined derivation is made so that the display result derived to the variable display area can be specified when the derivation operation means is operated at each operation timing. Derived control table storage means for storing a plurality of control tables;
Derivation control table selection means for selecting one of a plurality of derivation control tables stored in the derivation control table storage means according to the determination result of the prior determination means;
A display result search means for searching for a display result that can be derived according to a determination result of the pre-decision means in a variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
When the derivation operation means is operated, a first derivation is performed to perform control for deriving a display result to a variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means based on the derivation control table selected by the derivation control table selection means. Control means;
Second derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result searched by the display result search means to a variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means when the derivation operation means is operated;
Including
When the derivation operation means is operated, control is performed to derive a display result in the variable display area by either one of the first derivation control means or the second derivation control means,
Further, the derivation control means includes
A first variable display area corresponding to the derivation operation means operated first when the determination result of the prior determination means is a first determination result including a determination that the occurrence of the specific award winning is permitted; The derivation operation means corresponding to the third variable display area is operated after the third variable display area corresponding to the last operated derivation operation means and the derivation operation means corresponding to the first variable display area are operated. At the time of the first result, the first derivation control means performs control for deriving the display result for at least one of the second variable display areas corresponding to the derivation operation means operated until Derivation control means;
When the determination result of the prior determination unit is the second determination result, the determination result of the prior determination unit among the first variable display region, the second variable display region, and the third variable display region Second result derivation control means for performing control for deriving display results by the second derivation control means for more variable display areas than when the first determination result is;
Including
The first result derivation control means is determined to allow the occurrence of the specific award winning by the predetermining means, and the specific award is given when the derivation operating means is operated in the specific winning operation procedure. Control is performed to derive display results in the plurality of variable display areas so as to be a combination of display results corresponding to winning, and the derivation operation means is operated in a non-specific winning operation procedure different from the specific winning operation procedure. A slot machine, comprising: a specific derivation control means for performing control for deriving a display result to the plurality of variable display areas so that a combination of display results corresponding to the specific prize winning is not obtained.

Images